JP7305468B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

In some pachinko game machines and slot machines, when a variable display result becomes a specific display result, a big win is advantageous to the player.

In this type of game machine, it is possible to execute a timer notice (predetermined effect) in which a plurality of timer notice images (predetermined display) displayed on the display means are updated and displayed in parallel, and the numerical value of each timer notice image is " 0”, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect such as a cut-in notice that suggests the possibility of a big hit (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-99548 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the effect time of each timer notice (the numerical value displayed in the timer notice image) is different, the suggestive effect is performed when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0". However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest because there is no unexpectedness.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of surprise and enhancing interest.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect for updating and displaying a predetermined display and capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state;
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, it is possible to display a first predetermined display and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display, which are displays suggesting the start timing of the suggestive effect, and
As the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display, and a numerical value that is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display and is displayed as the second predetermined display. A second update display that performs a decreasing update display can be performed such that at least a portion of each update display period overlaps,
the suggestive effect can be started when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display;
When the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 in the second update display, the suggestive effect can be started in the display area of the second predetermined display that has reached the specific numerical value,
it is possible to initiate the second update display while executing the first update display;
At the timing when the first update display is being executed, the second update display is terminated before the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display in the second update display is decreased to reach the specific numerical value. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect in a manner,
In the second predetermined display, if the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display is decreased and the second update display ends before reaching the specific numerical value, the suggestion effect corresponding to the second update display is performed. without executing
In the second update display, the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display is decreased to become the specific numerical value, and the suggestive effect corresponding to the second update display is started. The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display in the display does not decrease to the specific numerical value and the suggestive effect is not started .
Furthermore, the game machine of means 1 is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantageous set value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set value (for example, , 4 to 6), a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can set one of a plurality of setting values including
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) to update and display a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)). Effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled,
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (for example, a first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (for example, a second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display can be displayed,
As the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display (for example, "15:00") is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display. a second update display that performs an update display for decreasing the numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed as the second predetermined display so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps. and (see FIG. 8-20 (D)),
When the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 finishes the second update display at timing Ta3 , at a timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first timer image Z11 is displayed in an enlarged manner and the effect image Z15 is displayed around it, all the decoration pattern display areas 5L, After the decorative patterns 5C and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is restarted at timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has passed from timing Ta4. The part where the pseudo-continuous effect is started (see Figures 8-24 and 8-25),
When the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 in the second update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the second timer image Z12 to "1:00", the second update display is stopped, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and the effect image Z16 is displayed around it, and then the dialogue notice is started. 8-24, see Figure 8-25),
As the numerical value of the second predetermined display, a numerical value smaller than the numerical value of the first predetermined display can be displayed at a higher rate than a numerical value larger than the numerical value of the first predetermined display (for example, timer notice pattern TY -1 to TY-5, "15:00" is displayed on the first timer image Z11, while "10:00" is displayed on the second timer image Z12 in patterns TY-2, TY-3, and TY-5. The part to be displayed (see Fig. 8-21(A)),
moreover,
Determining means (for example, CPU103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 5) and,
Based on the determination result of the determining means, an advantage suggesting effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect) that suggests control to the advantageous state includes a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). Advantageous suggestive effect execution means that can be executed in a mode not including (for example, a portion that executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 7 after the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18) and,
with
The advantageous suggestion effect execution means is
When the unfavorable set value is set and the determining means has not determined to control the advantageous state, the advantageous suggesting effect including the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, the As shown in 9-21 (B), when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, the cut-in effect is performed in the pattern CI-. 3 non-executable part),
When the advantageous set value is set and the determination means has not decided to control the advantageous state, the advantageous suggestive effect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 9-21 (C) to FIG. 9-21 (E), if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is out , the part where the cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3),
When the advantage suggesting effect is executed, a special pattern in which control to the advantageous state is notified after it is once suggested that the control to the advantageous state is not performed (resurrection effect shown in FIG. 9-6 is executed) Has a super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5)),
In the case where the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio of execution of the advantageous suggestive effect including the specific effect is the ratio of execution of the advantageous suggestive effect not including the specific effect. Lower than (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 (A) to 9-21 (E), when performing variable display in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the resurrection effect, the resurrection effect Part where the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with pattern CI-3 is set lower than when executing variable display with the variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the numerical value when the suggestive effect is executed differs between the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, the degree of unexpectedness increases, and thus the interest is improved. Moreover, since the period until the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value is shortened, interest is improved. In addition, when it is suggested that an advantageous suggestive effect including a specific effect is executed and control is not performed to an advantageous state, the advantageous state is established by the special pattern even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. By notifying that the control is to be performed, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to the recognition being erroneous.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effects, a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 However, when the variable display result is a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (twice) and the dialogue notice patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when it is lost),
The rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed is higher when the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 than when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0. (For example, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is a specific numerical value (“1:00”), the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 does not become a specific numerical value, and only the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is The part where the execution of the dialogue announcement of patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability is decided at a higher rate than when it becomes a numerical value indicating “0” (“0:00”))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect in a manner in which the second update display ends before the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , the part that can execute the timer notice based on the pattern TY-2 that terminates the second update display when the numerical value is "5:00")
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The production executing means is
While the first update display is being executed as the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the second predetermined display and start the second update display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first update After the display is started, the portion where the second update display is started at the timing T1 before the timing T3 at which the first update display ends (see FIG. 8-20(D)),
When the first update display is being executed and before the second predetermined display is displayed, the second predetermined display is displayed to provide a special effect suggesting that the second update display is started. (For example, after the effect control CPU 120 starts the first update display, the second timer image Z12 is displayed and the second update display is performed before the timing Ta2 at which the second timer image Z12 is displayed. A part where a special effect is performed to suggest that the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the second update display.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The effect executing means can execute an interlocking effect interlocked with the update display of the second predetermined display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the decrease in the numerical value by the first update display. A part that outputs sounds such as "5...4..." and flashes the game effect lamp 9)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of updating display of numerical values.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means 6 to 14 below. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There was one that could execute an effect (specific effect) that suggests whether a value has been set. In such a game machine, the variable display result did not become a big hit (the variable display result was not controlled to an advantageous state) because the specific effect was executed and the variable display result was lost (not controlled to an advantageous state). ) Instead, it is conceivable to notify that the set value set in the game machine is a set value (advantageous set value) advantageous to the player, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. However, some game machines are capable of executing an effect (special pattern) in which the variable display result indicates that the variable display result will be a big win after once suggesting that the variable display result will be a loss. For this reason, in such a game machine, even if it is suggested that the variable display result is a win when the specific effect is executed, if the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big win, the set value is advantageous to the game machine. Although the player recognizes that the is set, there is a problem that the interest in the game is reduced due to the recognition being wrong. is requested to provide.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantageous set value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set value (for example, , 4 to 6), a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can set one of a plurality of setting values including
Determining means (for example, CPU103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 5) and,
Based on the determination result of the determining means, an advantage suggesting effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect) that suggests control to the advantageous state includes a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). Advantageous suggestive effect execution means that can be executed in a mode not including (for example, a portion that executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 7 after the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18) and,
with
The advantageous suggestion effect executing means is
When the unfavorable set value is set and the determining means has not determined to control the advantageous state, the advantageous suggesting effect including the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, the As shown in 9-21 (B), when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, the cut-in effect is performed in the pattern CI-. non-executable part in 3),
When the advantageous set value is set and the determination means has not decided to control the advantageous state, the advantageous suggestive effect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 9-21 (C) to FIG. 9-21 (E), if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is out , the part where the cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3),
When the advantage suggesting effect is executed, a special pattern in which control to the advantageous state is notified after it is once suggested that the control to the advantageous state is not performed (resurrection effect shown in FIG. 9-6 is executed) Has a super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5)),
In the case where the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio of execution of the advantageous suggestive effect including the specific effect is the ratio of execution of the advantageous suggestive effect not including the specific effect. Lower than (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 (A) to 9-21 (E), when performing variable display in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the resurrection effect, the resurrection effect Part where the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with pattern CI-3 is set lower than when executing variable display with the variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the advantage suggesting effect including the specific effect is executed and it is suggested that the control is not in the advantageous state, the special pattern is generated even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. By notifying that the player is controlled in an advantageous state at , it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to the recognition being erroneous.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to means 6,
The advantageous set values include a first advantageous set value (for example, 4 or 5) and a second advantageous set value (for example, 6) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous set value;
The advantage suggesting effect executing means sets the first advantageous set value when the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state when the second advantageous set value is set. The advantageous suggestive effect including the specific effect can be executed at a higher rate than when it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 9- As shown in 21 (C) to FIG. 9-21 (E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the super reach γ is variably displayed as a variation pattern. is executed, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the cut-in effect is most likely to be executed in the pattern CI-3. The part where the ratio of the cut-in effect to be executed in pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest when the set value is 4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can expect that the second advantageous setting value is set by executing the specific performance with high frequency and not being controlled to the advantageous state, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to means 6 or 7,
Regardless of which setting value is set, the rate at which the special pattern is executed when the determining means determines that the control is to be in the advantageous state is the same (for example, FIG. As shown in 9-13 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 uses the big hit variation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 to determine the variation pattern. part that determines
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the rate at which the special pattern is executed follows the set value that determines the rate at which it is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 8,
A special notification effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, cut-in effect of pattern CI-4) that is different from the specific effect and notifies that it is controlled to the advantageous state 7 after the CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18),
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, big win A or big win B big win gaming state) and a second advantageous state (for example, big win C big winning gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. including
When the special notification effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 and 9-22, the cut-in effect is pattern CI- 4, the variable display result always becomes a big win and is controlled to the big win game state of big win C),
When the advantageous suggesting effect including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, the control is performed to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-21 and 9 As shown in -22, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result is a big win, the game state is controlled to one of the big win A, the big win B, and the big win C. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special notification effect is executed, and there is a case where the advantage suggesting effect including the specific effect is executed and the second advantageous state is controlled. , it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest when the advantage suggesting performance including the specific performance is executed when the advantageous set value is set and the control is not performed to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 9,
The advantageous suggesting effect executing means performs a first advantageous suggesting effect (for example, reach effect of super reach γ) that can be executed in a mode including or not including the specific effect, and in a mode similar to the specific effect. A second advantageous suggesting effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach δ) that can be executed in a mode including a similar effect (for example, a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight) can be executed as the advantageous suggesting effect. can be,
When the second advantageous suggestive effect is executed, the advantageous state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22, during the reach effect of super reach δ, the cut-in effect is in pattern CI-3 If it is executed, the variable display result will always be a big hit)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variations of the advantageous suggesting performance are increased, and whether or not the advantageous suggesting performance to be executed is the second advantageous suggesting performance in which the similar performance similar to the specific performance is executed and is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the game, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 10,
The advantageous suggesting effect executing means does not execute the advantageous suggesting effect including the specific effect when the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the modification 208SG-1 shown in FIG. 9-33). As shown in (A) to FIG. 9-33 (E), when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the cut-in effect is not executed in the pattern CI-3. possible part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the advantage suggesting effect including the specific effect is executed and it is suggested that the control is not in the advantageous state, the special pattern is generated even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to the notification that the control is in an advantageous state as.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 11,
A first predetermined suggestive effect (for example, pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) as a predetermined suggestive effect (for example, advance notice effect) that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the control is performed in the advantageous state. and a second predetermined suggestive effect (for example, pattern YE-3) that suggests that the control to be in the advantageous state is performed at a higher rate than the first predetermined suggestive effect (for example, pattern YE-3). A portion for executing the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 7 after the control CPU 120 executes the notice effect determination processing shown in FIG. 9-25)
The predetermined suggesting effect executing means is set to the advantageous setting value, and when the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the advantageous suggesting in a mode including the specific effect. When the effect is executed, the execution of the second predetermined suggestive effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. When the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE- with a high degree of expectation for a big hit are executed when the advance notice effect is executed. Determine the production pattern from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding 4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player's expectation for being controlled to be in an advantageous state is excessively increased by executing the specific performance and the second predetermined suggestive performance, even though the control is not to be in an advantageous state. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 12,
A special effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a notice effect of pattern YE-4) that informs that the control is performed in the advantageous state, which is different from the specific effect After executing the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-25, the part for executing the effect process during variable display shown in FIG.
The special effect executing means limits the execution of the special effect when the advantageous suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed when the advantageous state is controlled (for example, FIG. 9-26 (A ), when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which are effect patterns with a high degree of expectation for a big win, the advance notice effect is given. When executed, the part that determines the production pattern from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 with high expectations for big hits)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the special effect is executed in advance when the specific effect is executed, thereby controlling the advantageous state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is played, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 13,
As game states different from the advantageous state, the first game state (eg, low-probability-low base state and low-probability-high base state) and the second game state (for example, High probability high base state) and controllable game control means (for example, the part where CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
The advantageous suggesting effect executing means can execute the advantageous suggesting effect in the first game state and the second game state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-13 and 9-14, the CPU 103 Variation pattern selectable part of Super Reach regardless of state),
When the advantageous set value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the advantageous suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed in the second game state. is higher than the rate at which the advantageous suggesting effect of the aspect including the specific effect is executed in the first game state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21, the pachinko game machine 1 If the set value is any of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is a super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), if the set value is the same value, cut in a high probability high base state Part where the proportion of in-effects executed in pattern CI-3 is set higher than the proportion of cut-in effects executed in pattern CI-3 in low probability low base state and low probability high base state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second game state, the advantageous suggestive effect including the specific effect not controlled to the advantageous state indicating that the advantageous set value is set is more likely to be executed than in the first game state. , the interest in the second game state can be improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for determining effects during variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect type during variable display; (A) is a diagram showing an effect (prediction of reach) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (low) presentation mode based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (high) presentation mode based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as Modified Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing determination ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion when using effect type determination table C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of timer announcement effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a timer notice, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a timer notice and a dialogue notice, (C) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the timer notice, and (D). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an update display of a timer advance notice; (A) is a diagram showing a timer notice type, and (B) is a diagram showing a line notice type. (A) is a diagram showing a timer notice type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a dialogue notice type determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a timer advance notice update display based on pattern TY-2, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a timer advance notice update display based on pattern TY-5, and (C) is an example of a timer advance notice effect operation. is a timing chart showing (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an operation example of the timer advance notice effect. (A) to (I) are diagrams showing other operation examples of the timer advance notice effect. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an operation example of timer notice as Modification 2, (G) is a diagram showing a pattern of numerical values displayed at the start, and (H) is a diagram showing a pattern of updating speed. (A) is a diagram for explaining the details of the timer advance notice as Modified Example 3, (B) is a diagram showing an example of an updated display of the timer advance notice, and (C) is a diagram showing an operation example of the timer advance notice effect. 14 is a timing chart showing an operation example of a timer announcement effect as Modified Example 4. FIG. (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an operation example of the timer advance notice effect. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit variation pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a small-hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a cut-in effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios in pattern CI-3 of the cut-in effect; 9 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect determination process; They are an explanatory diagram showing an execution ratio of the advance notice effect and a determination ratio of the effect pattern, and an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of an advance notice effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a notification mode of a variable display result for each variation pattern; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-1; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of cut-in effects and the determination ratio of effect patterns in modification 208SG-2; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-3; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios of the announcement effect and effect pattern determination ratios in Modified Example 208SG-4. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-5; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-6; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a set value suggesting effect executable period and a set value suggesting effect execution determination ratio in modification 208SG-7.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characterizing part 103SG of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the present embodiment, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-17.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball-hitting handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is the left-game area 103SG002L by operating the ball-hitting handle 30. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 103SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 103SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 103SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 103SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052, is accommodated in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 103SG201.

Since the substrate case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 103SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the store clerk possessing the setting key. The lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 103SG201. In other words, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 103SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 103SG025A, a second pending display device 103SG025B capable of displaying the second pending memory number, a normal symbol display device 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbols, a normal pattern pending display device 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal pattern pending memory number, A round display 103SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display section 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 103SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A uses two types of big win symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 103SG025A and the second suspension display 103SG025B each have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 103SG025A and second pending display 103SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the section 103SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 103SG025A is lit, and the second pending When the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG025B are lit), after the second special figure reservation storage becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory, the first special figure reservation A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 103SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 103SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and the second movable body 103SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. An origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 103SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Furthermore, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, after temporarily stopping and displaying the production pattern, the production pattern is changed again (pseudo continuous fluctuation, re-variation). includes a variation pattern that executes a “pseudo-continuous” variation display effect that makes it appear as if the variation display is being performed multiple times. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table (not shown) ), a small hit variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), a losing variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), a normal figure display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal figure variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), etc. .

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 8-7A and 8-7B are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characterizing section 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, and 1/180 when the setting value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and may vary the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a "small hit" depending on the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In the present embodiment, a total of six set values, 1 to 6, are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 8-8 (A) and Figure 8-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which the high-probability control and the time-saving control are executed after the end and shifts to a high-probability high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. In other words, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of a big hit, the easier it is to determine the big win C as the type of big win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area A switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the big hit variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit (pseudo consecutive once) (PB1-4), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), Variation pattern of super reach α jackpot (2 pseudo-runs) (PB1-5), variation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), variation pattern of super reach β jackpot (2 pseudo-runs) (PB1-6) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern.

Thus, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2, PB1-5) is the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3, PB1-6) is higher than the ratio that determines PB1-6), and the set values are set to be lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3, PB1-6) is the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2 , PB1-5) and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of the jackpot is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", and the type of jackpot is "jackpot A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, a "jackpot B" or a "jackpot C" may occur. can raise the expectations of

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss A, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (pseudo consecutive 1 time) (PA2- 4), variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), variation pattern of super reach α loss (pseudo consecutive 2 times) (PA2-5), variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), super reach A predetermined random value within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-6) of deviation of β (two pseudo-runs).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss B, a shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total number of retained memories of 2 to 4, a normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), a normal reach Missing (1 pseudo-run) variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach α missing variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach α missing (2 pseudo-runs) variation pattern (PA2-5), super reach Predetermined random value is determined from the range that random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of β deviation (PA2-3) and the variation pattern (PA2-6) of super reach β deviation (pseudo-run). assigned as a value.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, a shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of retained memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), a normal reach Missing (1 pseudo-run) variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach α missing variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach α missing (2 pseudo-runs) variation pattern (PA2-5), super reach Predetermined random value is determined from the range that random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of β deviation (PA2-3) and the variation pattern (PA2-6) of super reach β deviation (pseudo-run). assigned as a value.

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), the normal reach deviation (1 pseudo continuous ) variation pattern (PA2-4), variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), variation pattern of super reach α loss (pseudo consecutive 2 times) (PA2-5), variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3), a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) of the super reach β deviation (pseudo-run). .

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a miss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a failure, regardless of the set value that has been set, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α and the variation pattern of the super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value is the same. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, a mode is illustrated in which the determination ratio of the non-reach and normal reach variation patterns differs according to the set value. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is illustrated in which a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation that differs according to the total pending storage number, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol, and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the second A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss according to the number of reserved memories of 2 special symbols).

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the super reach loss variation The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 to 3, PA2-4 to 6) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach out according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. , The present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executed with a variation pattern of

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the form of determining the variation pattern at a different rate for each setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the variation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display section 103SG029A, a second display section 103SG029B, a third display section 103SG029C, and a fourth display section 103SG029D. Each of the first display portion 103SG029A to the fifth display portion 103SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 103SG029A to fifth display section 103SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 103SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (B) and 8-10 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all gaming states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 103SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. 8-11 is a flow chart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (103SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). move on.

At 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 103SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (103SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is designated as an identifiable set value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 103SG029 is terminated.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF at 103SGSa011 (103SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the processes of 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

At 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 103SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) , and proceed to 103SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as indicated by 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), proceed to 103SGSa022; (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

In addition, at 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened, the lock switch 103SG051 is turned on, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (103SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processes 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (103SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (103SGSa026; N), the processing of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 103SG029 stops blinking (103SGSa027) and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 103SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (103SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (103SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change described later, etc., to the effect control board 12. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (103SGSa034; N), the processing of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 is repeatedly executed. 103SG029A, second display unit 103SG029B, third display unit 103SG029C, and fourth display unit 103SG029D constituting the display monitor 103SG029 as a notification (error notification) of recovery from a power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (103SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are notified of the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON at 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined at 103SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014 ;Y).

8-12 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set at 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning, 1 buffer number It shifts up by minutes (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets 3 symbols as even numbers as the stop symbols. A combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous variation pattern (103SGS276A). The variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. If the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, proceed to 103SG280A. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, the process advances to 103SG277 to execute the effect determination processing during variable display shown in FIG. (103SGS277).

(Effect during variable display)
The effect during the variable display includes, as a result of effect, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests control to the jackpot game state, a setting suggestion result that suggests the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process, It is an effect (predetermined effect) that can be either. In this characterizing part 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a ready-to-win notice (announcement effect) that suggests the possibility of a big hit with the variable display mode becoming a reach as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggesting result. be. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in which both the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion can be executed when the effect result can be either the advantageous state suggesting result or the setting suggesting result. When it is possible, it is possible to execute the ready-to-reach notice in which the performance result is the advantageous state suggestion result, prior to the setting suggestion in which the performance result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 8-14, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. When the execution is determined, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the basis for executing the variable display effect, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the effect mode. It is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 8-16 (A) to (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display of the pattern (timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win). Then, a plurality of (e.g., eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The effect during variable display ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while a plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies will break and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies will break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies will break and fall. , In the case of the pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and dropped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-16 (B) and 8-17 (A), patterns PT-1 to PT-8 all have the same timing at which the paraglider is destroyed, and each pattern PT-1 to A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number of them may be fine). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-17(B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like pattern PT-8. 8 is different. Specifically, 7 paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining 1 body is destroyed at the 2nd timing after the 1st timing when the other 7 bodies are destroyed. .

The production period of such variable display production is executed based on which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, the ready-to-reach notice in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result or the production result is a setting suggestion result Regardless of which of the setting suggestion is to be and a non-common mode effect that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and a non-common effect period during which the effect of moving downward in the display area of No. 5) is executed.

In addition, in the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as an effect during the variable display, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed in a smaller size than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Also, during the execution period of the effect during variable display, another notice effect or the like different from the effect during variable display may be executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-14, among patterns PT-1 to PT-9, for patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7, the set value is 1. For patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are specific patterns (specific modes) corresponding to setting suggestions that suggest which of ~ 6, and the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, It is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach. In other words, during the variable display effect, the effect mode in the common effect period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders to be destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and the number of paragliders is 1 to 7. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set values are odd numbers (eg, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set values are even numbers. (eg, 2, 4, 6). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of set values 5 and 6 (high setting) is determined. The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation that the The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high);

In addition, in this characteristic portion 103SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 to 3 may be low and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the pattern may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the pattern will be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern with low expectation of super reach by being determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the pattern is normal reach {reach notice (low), first specific aspect}, and for pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach advance notice (high), second special mode}.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 is a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests control to the jackpot gaming state and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-9) that suggests settings. 1 to PT-7) can be executed during variable display based on one of a plurality of types of presentation modes, and a reach notice (predetermined special mode presentation) based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 If setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific aspect) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, ready-to-win notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion.

In this embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Since the variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a loss than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 is a super reach, that is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is a loss, so the pattern PT-9 is , Super Reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the effect during variable display, the number of destroyed paragliders indicates the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set. It is not limited to this, and a big hit or high setting may be suggested by the appearance of a predetermined number (e.g., eight) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and to suggest which setting value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, such as the number of appearances of characters, the type of characters that appear, etc. It may be possible to suggest a big hit or a set value by means of.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the numbers corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or illuminating the game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that a big hit or a pattern with a high degree of expectation is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-13, in the process of determining effects during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variable display result and a variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, while extracting the random number for determining the reach notice type, using the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. A lottery is held to determine the type of reach advance notice in the case of 103SGS292.

8-15 (A) in the production (reach notice) type determination table A, when the variation pattern is super reach, 20 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 are assigned to pattern PT-8. , and 60 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the variation pattern is super reach, PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than super reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. there is In other words, when the variation pattern is normal reach, PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than normal reach.

Also, when the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the variation pattern is normal reach, the pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is normal reach, and when the variation pattern is super reach, The pattern PT-9 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than the cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when the production based on the pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach fluctuation pattern than the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the production based on the pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is highly likely that it is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and the pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Because there is a high possibility that it will be, it is a pattern of reach notice (high) with high expectations for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 8-13, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of performing a lottery for the presence or absence of the reach notice execution and the type in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). If it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Go to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-9 is not won in 103SGS292, that is, if reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 is won, reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) } is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS295). Next, while extracting the setting suggestion type determination random number, using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, whether or not setting suggestion is executed in the effect during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-15(B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1. , 10 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 25 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-4, and pattern Four judgment values are assigned to PT-5, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. If the set value is an even number 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and if the set value is 5 , pattern PT-5 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, pattern PT-6 wins at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's getting easier. In addition, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, the set value of 6 is confirmed when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 where the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider will be destroyed. If an effect based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of characters displayed is 5 or more is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the set value is either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are suggested to be high (set value 5 or 6) with a low possibility of being set (low), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set to high (set value 5 or 6). 6) is set as a setting suggestion (high) with a high possibility.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the reach announcement type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of each determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number may be determined as appropriate. Just do it. In addition, each determination random number counter for generating these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in random number update processing.

Returning to FIG. 8-13, the effect control CPU 120, as a result of performing the lottery of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} A decision is made as to whether or not the prize has been won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been elected, if the non-execution of the reach announcement is elected in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on is uniquely determined, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298), and proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won , Based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the winning of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at 103SGS297, it is determined whether the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is winning at 103SGS293 (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was won in 103SGS300, when non-execution of setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is elected in 103SGS297, reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 Execution is determined (103SGS301) over setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 through PT-4 and proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is not won in 103SGS300, it is determined whether any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined (103SGS302), and if any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is selected, it is decided to execute the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Also, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 have been won, that is, if the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without determining the execution of the variable display effect. Terminate the effect determination process.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 8-12, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution determination flag is set at 103SGS278, that is, determines whether the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277. In the process, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined.

When the variable display effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, sets the period until the start of the variable display effect start waiting timer for variable display effect start (103SGS279), and executes the variable display effect effect. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and go to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the effect execution determination flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the effect during variable display, in this characteristic part 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the effect during variable display. Since the effect during variable display is specified based on and is set to start the effect during variable display, the period until the start timing of effect during variable display is set to the timer for waiting to start the effect during variable display. The present invention is not limited to this. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the effect during variable display is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

Further, when it is determined at 103SGS276A that the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation pattern, at 103SGS280A, the effect control CPU 120 executes timer notice effect determination processing shown in FIG. Decide whether to execute (103SGS280A). The details of the timer announcement effect determination process will be described later.

Next, after the timer notice effect determination process is executed at 103SGS280A, whether or not the timer notice effect execution determination flag is set, that is, any of the patterns PTY-1 to PTY-5 in the timer notice effect determination process of 103SGS280A. (103SGS280B).

When the timer notice effect execution determination flag is set, proceed to 103SGS280C, set the timer notice effect start waiting timer to the period until the timer notice effect start (103SGS280C), and clear the timer notice effect execution determination flag. (103SGS280D) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the timer announcement effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS280C and 103SGS280D.

As for the period until the timer effect is started, the timing at which the first timer, which will be described later, is displayed is the start timing of the timer effect, and the process of the timer effect is executed from the start of the timer effect. It is specified based on the table and the timer announcement effect is started.

At 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU120 is controlled to perform a variable display of the decoration pattern by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU120 is the variation pattern A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (103SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (103SGS286).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120, when executing the variable display of the symbols based on the reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode At performance timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or a setting suggestion as a performance during variable display, and when determining whether or not to execute the performance during variable display, the reach notice becomes an advantageous state suggestion result as a performance result. It is possible to execute the (special mode effect) with priority over the setting suggestion (specific mode effect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display in FIG. take precedence over

That is, the effect control CPU120, in the lottery of the reach notice, if the variation pattern is super reach, to determine the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294), reach Notice (high) will be executed (prioritized) at a higher rate than setting suggestions. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is 60%. , even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296 based on the reach notice (low) winning, setting suggestions based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at 103SGS297 (high ) is not won, 103SGS301 will determine the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, so reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (preferred) than the setting suggestion. Become.

In addition, the reach notice includes reach notice (low) and reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of control to a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT -9 and the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach prediction (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is set to the pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest caused by the effect during the variable display due to the excessive priority given to the advance notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) that suggests that the setting suggestion (low) is likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). -When both setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-8 Predictive reach (low) based on 103SGS301 can be executed in preference to setting suggestions (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the setting suggestion and the restriction on the execution of the ready-to-win announcement.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For more information, Reach Warning High precedes Setting Suggestion High, Setting Reach Warning High precedes Reach Warning Low, and Reach Warning Low precedes Setting Suggestion ( low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "prediction of reach (high)>suggestion of setting (high)>prediction of reach (low)>suggestion of setting (low)".

In this characteristic part 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the effect during variable display is a effect executed during the variable display period of the pattern, and the ready-to-reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least It suggests which set value is not changed during the operating period. In addition, it is not preferable for the game arcade that setting suggestions are frequently made and the player can easily guess what the set value is. Therefore, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the variable display effect is executed when the set value is high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. However, since the suggestion of a big win can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the ready-to-win notice appears at a higher rate than the set suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display production is a production that is executed only during the variable display period of the pattern based on the super reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation for big hits than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is a reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win is higher than in the case where the reach is not achieved. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, particularly in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease, and the production will become inappropriate. It is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming inappropriate by executing the notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a tendency of the effect during the variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, with a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern, and a high In some situations, such as setting, the execution ratio may be set such that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is preferentially executed (before) the lottery for the setting suggestion. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution ratio of the ready-to-win announcement becomes higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the setting suggestion lottery may be performed prior to the ready-to-reach announcement lottery. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, It is not limited to what is described.

In the present embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a setting suggestion that suggests a setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified. is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the pachinko game machine 1 was started last time.

(First Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the first invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode is the timing before reaching the reach)), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can be executed as shown in FIG. 8- 13, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement, the execution of the ready-to-win announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is decided in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestions. Even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, 103SGS301 Reach notice (low ) is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, etc. / Production control CPU 120, reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > Reach notice (low) > Setting suggestion (low) The part that determines the execution of the production based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 (see Figure 8-18 of modification 1))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to the execution of the predetermined performance in the specific mode when the control is performed in the advantageous state.

Specifically, even if the variable display result is a big hit, setting suggestions that can be suggested even at timings other than the variable display are prioritized over the reach notice. , the player's expectation for the big win cannot be suitably increased, and the performance can be prevented from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., reach notice (low)) and a second special mode (e.g., reach notice (high)) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, , When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. high) is determined prior to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-13 of the first embodiment, at 103 SGS 298 Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to excessive restriction on the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high )) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, , If any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. -Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific mode. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the lottery for the reach notice in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-13 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Action prompt notification means capable of executing action prompt notification prompting the player to perform an action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation prompt effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. executable part.) and
Action detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific action (for example, action of operating push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the action promotion notification by the action promotion notification means is being executed. and,
with
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific action by the action detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can press the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific action to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can execute an effect to change to the image Z2 (destroy the paraglider and make it fall).Modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific action can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period during which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, either a reach notice or a setting suggestion) A common effect period during which an effect is executed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area regardless of whether there is a common effect period) and the predetermined special mode. A non-common effect period that can specify whether it is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 according to the effect pattern is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 8-16)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player as to whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode will be executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and is also a suggestion of setting (for example, both reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed. Sometimes, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) is displayed (for example, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a moving paraglider with a character appearing, etc.) is displayed. parts, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the case where both the ready-to-reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) are executable means, for example, the suggestion about the display result of one variable display. Any timing may be used as long as it is the timing at which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the pending memory If the display result is suggested, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory is executed and during the execution period of the variable display. . In addition, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, when both reach notice (predetermined effect of special mode) and setting suggestion (predetermined effect of specific mode) can be executed, reach notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion. The lottery is executed with priority over the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is preceded by the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 and executing reach announcements based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It should be noted that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes the case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice execution rate is 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of destroyed paragliders suggests the possibility of a big hit or a set value, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. As an example, the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executed when they can be executed. Both the advantageous state suggesting result and the setting suggesting result may be included as the effect during variable display.

That is, in the first embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common common effect period between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the reach notice and the setting suggestion have different production modes (the common effect period It does not have a corresponding period) may be a separate production (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-18. 8-18, (A) is a flow chart showing the process of determining effects during variable display as Modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing execution ratios of ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the presence or absence of the execution of the reach notice and the type of the reach notice is performed with priority over the presence or absence of the execution of the setting suggestion and the lottery of the type, so that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery for ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-18(A), in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, along with extracting a random number for determining the effect type, using a table C (not shown) for determining the type of effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting), presence or absence of execution of effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach advance notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

Although not shown, the effect (reach notice/setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) sets the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratio of the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 varies depending on the type of variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, but the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in FIG. 8-18 (B) As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (preferred) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. (For example, 50% reach notice, 40% setting suggestion, and 10% non-execution are determined).

Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, reach notice (high) is higher than reach notice (low) (for example, reach notice (high) 40%, reach notice (low) 10%) is preferably determined by Also, if the setting values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) to setting suggestion (low) is higher than setting suggestion (high) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5 %). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 is the ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low) of the effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 Decide to execute.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is exemplified as a form in which the execution ratio is determined based on the variation pattern and the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, Depending on the variation pattern, the set value, and the result of the variable display, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different. Specifically, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach variation pattern, when the hit is a big hit, the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when the loss occurs. is preferred.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either one of the ready-to-reach notice and the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the effect during variable display is It is also possible to make it possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As the specific effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, the character (e.g. displaying an image of a moving paraglider in which appears), or displaying images in which the display mode of the paraglider (e.g., color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode It may be displayed, the background color may be changed, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may emit light in a special light emission mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the effect during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the effect during the variable display, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of them may be independently executable at a performance timing different from the presentation during display.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice in a manner different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in FIGS. It may be executable.

(Timer notice effect)
The effect control CPU 120 displays a timer image in the display area of the image display device 5 when the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a pseudo run (for example, any of PA2-4 to 6 and PB1-4 to 6). In addition, a timer notice (predetermined effect) that performs an update display (countdown) in which the numerical value displayed in the timer image is decreased (changed), and when the display mode of the timer image becomes a specific mode due to the update display, It is possible to execute a timer advance notice performance including a suggestion performance suggesting the possibility of being controlled to a big win game state advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 8-20 (A) and (B), in the timer notice, a first timer image Z11 (also referred to as a first timer) consisting of a rectangular frame-shaped frame image and numerical values displayed in the frame image is displayed. A second timer image Z12 (also referred to as a second timer) consisting of a rectangular frame-shaped frame image and numerical values displayed in the frame image is displayed at the left lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. be. The size, shape, arrangement position, and the like of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 are arbitrary, and are not limited to those described above.

As shown in FIG. 8-20(C), the numerical value (start value) displayed at the start of the timer notice is "15:00" (hereinafter also abbreviated as "15") for the first timer image Z11. ), and the second timer image Z12 is "10:00" or "15:00" (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "10" or "15"). Further, after performing the update display in the mode of decreasing the numerical value, the numerical value (final value) at which the numerical update display is stopped is "0:00" for the first timer image Z11 and "1" for the second timer image Z12. : 00”. Thus, these numbers are numbers that indicate time. Further, the update display speed of the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is the first speed (slow) that decreases by about 1 per second, and the update display speed of the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is , a second speed (fast) that decreases by about 2 to 5 per second.

In the case of the first timer image Z11, the effect control CPU 120 sets the numerical value indicating the time displayed (set) at the start to "15, 14, 13, 12, ... 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0”, while the second timer image Z12 is displayed (set) at the start, the numerical value indicating the displayed (set) time is changed to “10” or “15”. are updated and displayed in such a manner as to be "10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1" in such a manner that they decrease by about 2 to 5 every second. That is, the effect control CPU 120 updates and displays the numerical value displayed on the second timer image Z12 at a second speed faster than the first speed for updating the numerical value displayed on the first timer image Z11.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a first update display (first countdown) in which the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is decreased at a first speed, and when this numerical value becomes "0:00", a simulated While performing the continuous effect, a second update display (second countdown) is performed in which the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is decreased at a second speed faster than the first speed, and this numerical value becomes "1:00". Give a speech notice when it becomes. That is, in the first update display, the effect control CPU 120 performs the update display when the display mode of the first timer image Z11 becomes the first specific mode, which is the numerical value ("0:00") indicating "0". While stopping, in the second update display, the update display is stopped when the display mode of the second timer image Z12 becomes the second specific mode that is a numerical value ("1:00") different from "0". .

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (D), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first timer image Z11 at the timing T0 to start the first update display when performing the timer notice, and the first A second timer image Z12 is displayed to start the second update display at timing T1 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T0 at which the update display was started and before the first update display ends. In this case, the numerical value "10" displayed in the second timer image Z12 is smaller than the numerical value "15" displayed in the first timer image Z11, and the second update display is performed at a second speed faster than the first speed. , the second update display is stopped at timing T2 before the first update display ends.

Then, at timing T2 when the second update display ends, the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is erased and the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed. Then, a character image Z17 is displayed in the vicinity of the second timer image Z12, and a predetermined dialogue character image Z13 (see FIG. 8-20(B)) is displayed in the frame to start the dialogue announcement, thereby winning a big hit. suggests the possibility of Next, at timing T3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing T2 at which the second update display ends, the first update display is stopped and the timer notice is ended, and after temporarily stopping the decoration pattern at timing T3, it is variable again. Perform a pseudo-continuous effect to be displayed.

Thus, the effect control CPU 120 provides the first update display for updating the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 and the second update display for updating the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 in the timer advance notice effect. and so that at least a portion of each update display period overlaps. That is, it is possible to perform the first update display and the second update display in parallel (see FIG. 8-20(D)).

In addition, the timer notice is an effect that counts down the time until the start of the pseudo-continuous effect or dialogue notice, which is a suggestive effect. update display), update display period, update display start timing, size of numerical value displayed (set) at the start, update display speed, update display end timing, display mode when update display is stopped is different.

In particular, the second update display period in which the second update display is performed is shorter than the first update display period in which the first update display is performed, and the second update display is performed after the first update display is started, that is, Although it is started during execution of the first update display, it ends before the first update display.

As shown in FIG. 8-21(A), the timer notice has a plurality of types of production patterns (production modes) of patterns TY-1 to TY-5. TY-5 based on which performance pattern the timer advance notice is to be executed, that is, which of the patterns TY-1 to TY-5 the timer advance notice is to be executed based on is determined by a lottery.

Specifically, in the pattern TY-1, after the numerical value of "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value is changed to "0" at timing T3. : 00" and the first update display ends, but the second timer image Z12 is not displayed at timing T1, that is, the first update display is performed but the second update display is not performed. . In the pattern TY-1, not only is the second timer image Z12 not displayed at the timing T1 when the second timer image Z12 is displayed as described above, but also the second timer image Z12 is displayed at the timing T1. However, the numerical value to be updated may not be displayed, or the numerical value may be displayed in the second timer image Z12 at the timing T1, but the update display may end without starting.

In the pattern TY-2, after the numerical value "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value becomes "0:00" at timing T3. While the first update display ends at timing T1, the second timer image Z12 displays the numerical value "10:00" and the second update display starts. As shown, the second update display is stopped at timing T2A at which the numerical value decreases to "05:00" and is maintained before the end timing T2 at which the numerical value should be "1:00". This is a pattern in which the second timer image Z12 is erased at timing T2B and the second update display ends.

In the pattern TY-3, after the numerical value "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value becomes "0:00" at timing T3. While the first update display ends at timing T1, the value "10:00" is displayed in the second timer image Z12 at timing T1 to start the second update display. :00” and the second update display ends.

In the pattern TY-4, after the numerical value "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value becomes "0:00" at timing T3. While the first update display ends at timing T1, the value "15:00" is displayed in the second timer image Z12 at timing T1 to start the second update display. :00” and the second update display ends.

In the pattern TY-5, after the numerical value "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11 at timing T0 and the first update display is started, the numerical value becomes "0:00" at timing T3. While the first update display ends at timing T1, the second timer image Z12 displays the numerical value "10:00" and the second update display starts. As shown, the second update display is stopped and maintained (locked, held) for a predetermined time at timing T2A at which the numerical value decreases until it reaches "05:00", and then the second update display ends in pattern TY-2. In this pattern, the second timer image Z12 is erased and the second update display is terminated at the end timing T2 when the update display is restarted at timing T2B and the numerical value becomes "1:00".

As shown in FIG. 8-21(B), the dialogue notice has a plurality of types of production patterns (production modes) of patterns SY-1 to SY-4. SY-4 to SY-4, that is, which of the patterns SY-1 to SY-4 the speech announcement is to be executed is decided by a lottery.

Specifically, pattern SY-1 is a pattern in which the line content is "GOGO!", pattern SY-2 is a pattern in which the line content is "Maybe it's hot!?" The content is a pattern of "Hot!", and the pattern SY-4 is a pattern of the line content of "Extreme heat!".

In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the dialogue announcement is executed based on one of the above four types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the dialogue are arbitrary and can be modified in various ways. It is possible. In addition, it is also possible to execute a dialogue announcement based on one of five or more patterns or three or less patterns in which the dialogue content and the display mode of the character image Z17 are different. Further, although the character image Z18 of words can be displayed in the second timer image Z12, it may be displayed in an area other than the second timer image Z12.

As shown in FIG. 8-19, in the timer announcement effect determination process in 103SGS280A of the variable display start setting process described in FIG. 103SGS351). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, the random number for determining the type of timer notice is extracted, and the lottery for determining the type of timer notice to be executed is specified by 103SGS351 using the timer notice type determination table shown in FIG. 8-22(A). It is performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of pseudo-runs specified from the fluctuation pattern (103SGS352). Specifically, when the number of pseudo-runs is 1, it is performed twice, and when the number of pseudo-runs is 2, it is performed 3 times, and each determined pattern and execution order are memorized in the storage unit so as to be identifiable.

In the timer notice type determination table shown in FIG. 8-22(A), when the variation display result is the big hit display result, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-1, and 5 to pattern TY-2. , 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-3, 30 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-4, and 40 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-5. there is

When the variation pattern is a super reach loss with pseudo-run, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-1, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-2, and 50 to pattern TY-3. , 20 decision values are assigned to pattern TY-4, and 5 decision values are assigned to pattern TY-5.

When the variation pattern is normal reach loss with pseudo-run, 70 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-1, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-2, and 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern TY-3. is assigned a judgment value.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big hit, pattern TY-4 or pattern TY-5 is won at a higher rate than in the case of winning, and in the case of losing, pattern TY-4 or pattern TY-5 is won at a higher rate than in the case of winning. TY-1 to TY-3 are to be elected. Therefore, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher in the order of patterns TY-1, TY-2, TY-3, TY-4 and TY-5.

Returning to FIG. 8-19, after executing the processing of 103SGS352, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the dialog announcement type determination random number and uses the dialog announcement type determination table shown in FIG. 8-22(B). Then, a lottery for determining the type of speech announcement to be executed is performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive times specified from the variation pattern specified at 103SGS351 (103SGS353). Specifically, when the number of pseudo-runs is 1, it is performed twice, and when the number of pseudo-runs is 2, it is performed 3 times, and each determined pattern and execution order are memorized in the storage unit so as to be identifiable.

In addition, when execution of pattern TY-1 is determined as the timer notification type, the second update display is not executed, and when execution of pattern TY-2 is determined, the second update display will Since it will end, do not execute the dialogue announcement.

8-22(B), when the variation display result is the big hit display result, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern SY-1, and 20 determination values are assigned to pattern SY-2. , 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SY-3, and 40 decision values are assigned to pattern SY-4.

When the variation pattern is a super reach loss with pseudo-run, 40 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-1, 35 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-2, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-3. are assigned, and five decision values are assigned to pattern SY-4.

When the variation pattern is normal reach loss with pseudo-run, 70 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-1, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern SY-2, and 5 to pattern SY-3. is assigned a judgment value.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big hit, the pattern SY-3 or pattern SY-4 is won at a higher rate than in the case of a hit, and in the case of a hit, the pattern is drawn at a higher rate than in the case of a big win. SY-1 and SY-2 are supposed to be elected. Therefore, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher in the order of patterns SY-1, SY-2, STY-3 and SY-4.

Regarding the pseudo-run effect, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the pseudo-run (re-variable display of the decorative pattern) is performed than when the pseudo-run is not performed. The variation pattern is determined so that the reliability of the big hit increases as the number of symbol re-variable display increases.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a big hit, the rate is higher than when the variable display result is a loss, and timer notice based on TY-3 to TY-5 with high reliability and patterns SY-3 and SY- 4, execution of the advance notice of the dialogue is determined. In other words, when the variable display result is wrong, a pattern TY-1 in which the second timer image Z12 is not displayed or a pattern TY-2 in which the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 does not become the specific numerical value "1:00" is selected. Execution of the timer advance notice based on the pattern TY- is determined at a high rate. 3 to TY-5 are determined at a high rate to execute the timer advance notice.

That is, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes the specific numerical value (“1:00”) by the second update display, the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 does not become the specific numerical value and the first timer image Z11 is a numerical value (“0:00”) indicating “0” due to the first update display, the execution of the advance notice of the lines of patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability is decided at a higher rate. . In other words, the second update display of the second timer image Z12 in addition to the first timer image Z11 ( Patterns TY-2 to TY-5) have a higher reliability of a big hit.

Also, the reliability of the suggestive effect executed upon completion of the second update display may be higher than the reliability of the suggestive effect executed upon completion of the first update display.

After executing the process of 103SGS353, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer advance notice effect execution determination flag indicating that execution of the timer advance notice effect is determined (103SGS354), and ends the process.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern involving a pseudo-continuation, a timer announcement effect accompanied by a timer announcement or a dialogue announcement can be executed with a probability of 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that accompanies a pseudo-run, the execution of the timer advance notice effect is determined with a probability of less than 100%, that is, it is accompanied by a pseudo-run. In the case of the fluctuation pattern, the timer announcement effect may not be executed. In addition, the timer announcement effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (including 100%) in a variation pattern that does not involve a pseudo-run.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the timer notice effect is performed a plurality of times according to the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect, the effect pattern of the timer notice and the dialogue notice is individually determined for each time. When determining the pattern, the effect pattern may be determined based on the already determined effect pattern. In this case, the reliability of the effect pattern performed in the predetermined times should be the same as or higher than the reliability of the effect patterns performed in the time before the predetermined time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big win from decreasing due to the decrease in reliability as the timer announcement effect is repeated.

(Example of operation of timer notice effect)
Next, the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIG. 8-23(C) and FIG. Here, a case will be described as an example in which the timer notice is executed based on the pattern TY-3 and the speech notice is executed based on the pattern SY-3 in the super reach variation pattern with the pseudo continuation (twice).

As shown in FIG. 8-23 (C), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols based on the super reach variation pattern with pseudo-run (twice) (see FIG. 8-24 (A) ), the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and displayed in the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing Ta1 when the left and right decoration patterns are stopped after a predetermined time has passed from the timing Ta0 when the variable display is started. The first timer image Z11 displays "15:00" as a countdown value, and an effect image Z15 is displayed around the first timer image Z11. Then, the first timer image Z11 is reduced and displayed to start the first update display (see FIGS. 8-24 (B) and (C)).

Next, after the first update display is started, before the timing Ta2 for displaying the second timer image Z12, the second timer image Z12 is displayed to perform a special effect suggesting that the second update display is to be started. conduct. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-24(D), the special effect is to display the second timer image Z12A enlarged with higher transmittance than usual in the vicinity of the center of the display area, and then display the first timer image Z11. While moving toward the display position above the , the transmittance is lowered and reduced.

Further, when executing the timer announcement effect based on the pattern TY-1, after the second timer image Z12A is displayed near the center of the display area before the timing Ta2 for displaying the second timer image Z12 as described above, While moving toward the display position above the first timer image Z11, the transmittance decreases and is reduced, but at timing Ta2, the second timer image Z12 is erased without being displayed.

Note that the mode of the special effect is not limited to the one described above, and can be changed in various ways as long as the mode suggests that the second timer image Z12 is displayed and the second update display is started. For example, before the timing Ta2 for displaying the second timer image Z12, the display color of the background image may be changed to a predetermined color, or the character may carry the second timer image Z12. .

Next, at timing Ta2, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed. In the second timer image Z12, "10:00" is displayed as a countdown value, and an effect image Z16 different in mode from the effect image Z15 is displayed around the second timer image Z12. Then, the second timer image Z12 is reduced and displayed to start the second update display (see FIG. 8-24(E)). In the case of pattern TY-1, although the above-described special effects are performed, the second timer image Z12 is not enlarged and displayed at timing Ta2.

After that, the first update display and the second update display are performed together (see FIG. 8-24(F)). Further, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 changes to "5:00", the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds such as "5...4..." according to the decrease in the numerical value by the first update display. Let Also, although not shown, the game effect lamp 9 or the like may be made to blink in response to the decrease in the numerical value, or otherwise, in accordance with the second update display, in a mode other than display.

Then, at timing Ta3 when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00", the effect control CPU 120 stops the second update display, enlarges the second timer image Z12, and displays the surrounding area. After the effect image Z16 is displayed in (see FIG. 8-24(G)), the dialogue announcement is started. Specifically, the character image Z17 is displayed above the second timer image Z12, the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is erased, and the character image Z18 of "Hot!" corresponding to the pattern SY-3 is displayed. At the same time, the sound "Hot!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 8-24(H)).

In the present embodiment, as an interlocking effect interlocking with the update display of the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, "5...4..." '' and flashing the game effect lamp 9, but the present invention is not limited to this. In conjunction with this, the movable body 32 may be operated, or in an area different from the timer image in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect image may be displayed in conjunction with the update display.

Next, after the second update display ends at timing Ta3, at timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and displayed, and effects are displayed around it. Display the image Z15 (see FIG. 8-24(I)). Then, the decorative pattern indicating the pseudo run is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed (Fig. 8-24 (J)). reference). After that, the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 are erased.

Then, at a timing Ta5 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta4, the variable display of the decoration symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is resumed to start the pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in 24(B), the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and displayed at the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first update display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (C), the effect control CPU 120 is the first update display based on any of the determined patterns TY-1 to TY-5 and patterns SY-1 to SY-4. , and the second update display, the decoration symbols in all the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at timing Ta6 when the first update display ends. In addition, at timing Ta7, the variable display of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is restarted to start the pseudo-continuous effect, and the determined patterns TY-1 to TY-5 and patterns SY-1 to SY-4 are started. After performing the first update display and the second update display based on either of the above, when the first update display ends at timing Ta8, the variable display mode is set to the ready-to-win mode, and the super ready-to-win effect is started. In this way, the timer announcement and dialogue announcement corresponding to the first and second pseudo continuous effects are performed based on any of the determined patterns TY-1 to TY-5 and patterns SY-1 to SY-4. However, since the general flow is almost the same as the content shown in FIG. 8-24, detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, operation examples of pattern TY-2 and pattern TY-5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) and (B), the effect control CPU 120 stops displaying the left and right decorative patterns after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display, and at the timing T0, the image display device 5 After starting the first update display by enlarging the first timer image Z11 in the lower left corner of the display area (see FIG. 8-25 (A)), the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed for the second update display. (See FIG. 8-25(B)).

Then, at timing T2A when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes "5:00", the update display is stopped, and the state in which the numerical value "5:00" is displayed is maintained (Fig. 8-25 (C )reference). At this time, the first update display is continued.

Next, in the case of pattern TY-2, after erasing the second timer image Z12 at timing T2B after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing T2A and ending the second update display (see FIG. 8-25 (D)), At the timing T3 when the 1-update display is completed, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8-25 (E)).

On the other hand, in the case of pattern TY-5, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed again at timing T2B after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing T2A (see FIG. 8-25 (F)), At timing T2 when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00", the second update display is stopped (see FIG. 8-25 (G)), and the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is erased to display the characters "Geki-netsu!" Then, after finishing the first update display at the timing T3 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes "0:00", the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8-25 (I)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the first update display, when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes a numerical value indicating 0 (eg, "0:00"), a suggestive effect (eg, pseudo Continuous effect) is started, whereas in the second update display, when the value of the second timer image Z12 reaches a specific value different from 0 (for example, “1:00”), a suggestive effect (for example, , dialogue notice) is started. In other words, the first update display and the second update display differ in the numerical value indicating the timing at which the suggestive effect is started, so that the player can be given a sense of surprise.

In addition, it is possible to notify the player of the difference between the start timing T2 of the speech effect and the start timing T3 of the pseudo-continuous effect, that is, the difference in the start timing of the suggestive effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, since the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 and the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 are different, the same numerical value is not updated at the same timing in the two timers. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the start timing of the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second update display of the second timer image Z12 is started after the first update display of the first timer image Z11 is started, and the first update display is started after the second update display is finished. Display ends. That is, the second update display started after the start of the first update display ends earlier than the first update display, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the start timing of each suggestive effect.

In addition, since the first updating display of the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is started and finished, it is only necessary to wait for the elapse of time, so the time until the suggestive effect is started is delayed. However, by starting the second update display while the first update display is being executed, the interest of the player can be attracted to the second update display, and the second update display is more attractive than the first update display. By ending the suggestive effect first and starting the suggestive effect, the expectation for the suggestive effect to be started when the first update display ends after that can be suitably increased.

In addition, since the update display speed differs between the first update display and the second update display, the relationship between the two numerical values changes as the timer advance notice elapses. Since it becomes difficult to predict which of the update displays ends first, that is, the start timing of each suggestive effect, the degree of surprise increases, and the interest in the game improves.

A change in the relationship between two numerical values means that, for example, at the first timing T1 shown in FIG. , the difference from the numerical value (for example, "10:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is "1", but at the second timing T2 later than the first timing T1, the first timer image Z11 The difference between the numerical value (eg, "5:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 and the numerical value (eg, "1:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is "4". and the value displayed in the second timer image Z12 changes over time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 are displayed in the same manner in any of the timer advance notice patterns TY-1 to TY-5. is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 may be changed to a specific display mode according to whether or not the variable display results in a big win. For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the display color of at least one of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 is changed with a higher probability than in the case of a loss, or the display color of at least one of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 is changed, the display is enlarged, or an effect is applied. You may make it display an image around.

(Modification 2)
Next, modification 2 of timer advance notice will be described with reference to FIG. 8-26. In the timer advance notice of the above-described embodiment, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the first update display for decreasing the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11, the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is decreased. Although the mode of ending the first update display after starting the second update display after starting the second update display has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first update display and the second update display. can be variously modified.

For example, the start timing of the second update display is not limited to a timing later than the start timing of the first update display. It may be the same timing Ta0 as , or may be a timing Ta0 before the start timing of the first update display as shown in FIG. 8-26(E).

The end timing of the second update display is not limited to the timing Ta1 before the end timing Ta2 of the first update display, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A). B) As shown in (D) and (E), timings Ta2 and Ta3 after the end timing Ta1 of the first update display may be set, or as shown in FIGS. The timing may be the same as the end timings Ta1 and Ta2 of one update display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26(E), after the second update display is started at the timing Ta0 before the start timing Ta1 of the first update display, and after the end timing Ta2 of the first update display may end at timing Ta3. That is, the second update display period may be longer than the first update display period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26(F), after starting the second update display at the same timing Ta0 as the start timing Ta0 of the first update display, may be terminated. That is, the second update display period may have the same length as the first update display period. In such a case, the timing when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes a numerical value indicating 0 (“0:00”) and the timing when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 (“1:00”) ) is almost the same timing, but since the numerical value (display mode) when the update display is stopped is different, it is possible for the player to recognize that the separate update display has ended. .

The timing when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes a numerical value indicating 0 (“0:00”) and the timing when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 (“1:00”). When the timings are the same, the suggestive effect based on the first update display and the suggestive effect based on the second update display may be performed in one effect. In this case, for example, one effect combining the pseudo-continuous effect and the dialogue announcement may be executed, or another effect different from the pseudo-continuous effect and the dialogue announcement may be executed.

Further, in each pattern shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) to (F), as shown in FIG. , pattern A in which the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is larger than the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12, and pattern A in which the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is smaller than the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12. It is possible to apply either pattern B to be used.

In each pattern shown in FIGS. 8-26A to 8-26F, the first update display in the first timer image Z11 and the second update display in the second timer image Z12 are shown in FIG. 2. As the speed of the update display, a pattern C in which the first update display is faster than the second update display, a pattern D in which the first update display is slower than the second update display, and a first update display in the second update display. It is possible to apply either pattern E in which the speed is the same as

Therefore, the first update display period and the second update display period including the start timing and end timing of the first update display and the second update display are selected by lottery as shown in FIGS. One of the patterns can be determined, and according to the determined pattern, the size of the numerical value displayed at the start of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 shown in FIG. 8-26 (G) is determined by lottery as either pattern A or B, and the speed of the first update display in the first timer image Z11 and the second update display in the second timer image Z12 shown in FIG. One of the patterns C to E may be determined by lottery.

Furthermore, the first update display period and the second update display including the size of the numerical value displayed at the start of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12, the start timing and the end timing of the first update display and the second update display are displayed. The display period, update speed, etc. may be determined based on the number of judgment values assigned according to the variable display results. It is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays a numerical value (e.g., "15:00") displayed on the first timer image Z11 at the start and a numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed on the second timer image Z12 at the start. : 00"), and when the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 in the first update display (for example, "0:00") is reached, the suggestive effect can be executed, and the second update display can be executed. If the suggestive effect can be executed when the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 becomes a specific numerical value different from "0:00" (for example, "1:00"), the first update display , the start timing and end timing of the second update display, the size of the numerical value displayed at the start of the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12, the first update display in the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 The speed of the second update display in can be varied.

In this way, two different numeric values displayed in one display area are updated, that is, the first update display and the second update display are performed so that at least a part of the update display period overlaps, The display mode when one update display (second update display) is stopped (for example, "1:00") is the display mode when the other update display (first update display) is stopped (for example, " 0:00") increases the unexpectedness.

In addition, since the speed of updating display differs between the first update display and the second update display, the relationship between the two numerical values changes as the time of the timer notice elapses. Since it becomes difficult to predict and unexpectedness increases, interest improves.

A change in the relationship between two numerical values means that, for example, at the first timing T1 shown in FIG. , the difference from the numerical value (for example, "10:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is "1", but at the second timing T2 later than the first timing T1, the first timer image Z11 The difference between the numerical value (eg, "5:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 and the numerical value (eg, "1:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is "4". and the value displayed in the second timer image Z12 changes over time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of patterns TY-1 to TY-5 that can be determined as the timer notification type are all the same in the start timing, end timing, and update display period of the first update display and the second update display. Although a certain form was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. At least two or more patterns may be selectable as the timer notification type from among a plurality of types of patterns in which at least one of the end timing, update display period, and update display speed is different.

In such a case, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a first pattern (for example, 8-26 (D) pattern) and a second pattern (FIG. 8-26) in which the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 becomes a specific numerical value before the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11. (A)), and when the timer notice can be executed based on one of a plurality of types of patterns, the dialogue notice based on the highly reliable patterns SY-3 and SY-4 is executed. The percentage of the time when the timer advance notice is executed based on the second pattern may be higher than that when the timer advance notice is executed based on the first pattern.

By doing so, not only can the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 become a specific numerical value, but also the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 can be displayed in the first timer image Z11. Since the degree of expectation of a big win differs depending on whether the specific numerical value comes before or after the numerical value, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the timer notice is executed based on the second pattern. can be done.

In addition, even if two or more patterns have the same at least one element among the start timing, end timing, update display period, update display speed, and numerical value size of the first update display and the second update display, there are differences in other factors. You may set so that a big-hit reliability may differ.

(Modification 3)
Next, a modification 3 of timer advance notice will be described with reference to FIG. 8-27. In the timer advance notice of the above embodiment, after starting the first update display of the numerical value (for example, "15:00") displayed in the first timer image Z11 at the first speed, the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 (eg, "10:00") is started at a second speed faster than the first speed and finished before the first update display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the first timer image Z11 displays a numerical value (e.g., "20:00") larger than the numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed on the second timer image Z12. The first update display may be started at a first speed faster than the second speed of the second update display and then finished before the second update display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), the numerical value (start value) displayed at the start of the timer notice is "20:00" (hereinafter, "20") for the first timer image Z11. ), and the second timer image Z12 is set to "10:00" (hereinafter also abbreviated as "10"). Further, after performing the update display in the mode of decreasing the numerical value, the numerical value (final value) at which the numerical update display is stopped is "0:00" for the first timer image Z11 and "1" for the second timer image Z12. : 00”. Further, the update display speed of the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 is set to the first speed (fast) that decreases by about 2 to 5 per second, and the update display of the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12. The speed is a second speed (slow) that decreases by about 0.5 per second.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (C), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first timer image Z11 at the timing T0 to start the first update display when performing the timer notice, and the first A second timer image Z12 is displayed to start the second update display at timing T1 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T0 at which the update display was started and before the first update display ends. In this case, the numerical value "20" displayed in the first timer image Z11 is larger than the numerical value "10" displayed in the second timer image Z12, and the second update display is performed at a first speed faster than the second speed. Therefore, the first update display is stopped at timing T2 before the second update display ends. After that, the second update display is stopped at timing T3.

As shown in FIG. 8-27(D), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols based on the super reach variation pattern with the pseudo-run (twice), from the timing Ta0 when the variable display is started. A first timer image Z11 is displayed at a timing Ta1 when the left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has passed, and after a first update display is started, a second timer image Z12 is displayed at a timing Ta2 to display the second timer image Z11. Start updating display. Next, at the timing Ta3 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00" and the first update display is finished, the decorative patterns in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, at timing Ta4, the variable display of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is resumed to start the pseudo continuous effect, and the first timer image Z11 is displayed again to start the first update display. Then, at timing Ta5 when the value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00" and the second update display is completed, the dialogue announcement is started, and at timing Ta6, the second timer image Z11 is displayed again to display the second timer image Z11. 2 Start updating display.

Next, at the timing Ta7 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00" and the first update display is completed, the decorative patterns in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, at timing Ta8, the variable display of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is resumed to start the pseudo continuous effect, and the first timer image Z11 is displayed again to start the first update display. Then, at timing Ta9 when the value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00" and the second update display is finished, the dialogue announcement is started, and at timing Ta10, the second timer image Z11 is displayed again to display the second timer image Z11. 2 Start updating display.

Next, at the timing Ta11 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00" and the first update display is terminated, the display mode of the decoration pattern is changed to the ready-to-win mode and developed into a super ready-to-win effect, and then the second At the timing Ta12 at which the value of the timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00" and the second update display is completed, the dialog announcement is started.

In this way, two different numeric values displayed in one display area are updated, that is, the first update display and the second update display are performed so that at least a part of the update display period overlaps, In the first update display, a numerical value larger than the numerical value to be updated in the second update display is updated and displayed at a faster speed than the second update display, and the second update display is finished first, so that two displays are displayed as the time of the timer notice elapses. A change occurs in the relationship between the numerical values, which makes it difficult to predict the start timing of each suggestive effect, increasing the degree of unexpectedness, thereby improving interest.

Specifically, at the first timing T1 shown in FIG. 8-27(B), the numerical value (for example, "16:00") displayed in the first timer image Z11 is displayed in the second timer image Z12. However, at the second timing T2, which is later than the first timing, the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 (eg, "0:00") is smaller. Since the numerical value (for example, "5:00") displayed in the second timer image Z12 is larger than the value displayed in the second timer image Z12, the unexpectedness increases.

Further, in the first timer image Z11, a large numerical value is updated and displayed at high speed, while in the second timer image Z12, a numerical value smaller than that of the first timer image Z11 is updated and displayed at a low speed. The difference in the update display mode between the first update display and the second update display can be more clearly seen, and the second update display is started at the timing T1 before the timing T2 at which the first update display ends. As a result, the player can expect execution of a new suggestive effect, and the second update display ends after the timing T2 at which the first update display ends, so the player's sense of expectation can be maintained. .

(Modification 4)
Next, a modification 4 of timer advance notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29. In the above-described embodiment, the timer notice is performed according to the execution timing of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display based on the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer notice is For example, it may be executed based on establishment of normal reach or super reach.

8-28 and 8-29 for the operation example of the timer notice effect shown in the modified example 3, which is executed when the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern. do.

As shown in FIG. 8-28, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the super reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 8-29 (A)), starts the variable display from the timing Ta0. At timing Ta1 when time passes and left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a ready-to-win display mode, the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and displayed in the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first timer image Z11 is displayed. The effect image Z15 is displayed around , and the first update display of the first timer image Z11 is started (see FIGS. 8-29 (B) and (C)).

Next, after the first update display is started, the second timer image Z12 is displayed before the timing Ta2 at which the second timer image Z12 is displayed, as a special effect suggesting that the second update display is started. After displaying the second timer image Z12A enlarged and displayed with a higher transmittance than usual near the center of the display area, the transmittance decreases while moving toward the display position above the first timer image Z11, Also, it is reduced (see FIG. 8-28(D)).

Next, at timing Ta2, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed, and the effect image Z16 is displayed around the second timer image Z12. Then, the second timer image Z12 is reduced and displayed to start the second update display (see FIG. 8-28(E)).

After that, the first update display and the second update display are performed together (see FIG. 8-28(F)), and at timing Ta3 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first After the update display is stopped, the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and the effect image Z15 is displayed around it (see FIG. 8-28(G)), the character image Z19 is displayed to develop into Super Reach. Performs a development effect suggesting that the player will do so (see Fig. 8-28 (H)).

Next, after the second update display ends at timing Ta3, at timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is changed to "1:00", the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and displayed, and effects are displayed around it. The image Z16 is displayed, and a cut-in notice is given in which a plurality of characters move across the display area from right to left all at once (see FIG. 8-28(I)). After that, at the end of the super ready-to-win production, the decorative patterns in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8-28 (J)), and the big hit (or losing) pattern is stopped and displayed. It informs that it has become a big hit (or loss).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described timer notice effect, another notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big win may be provided so that at least a part of the execution period of the other notice effect is the first update display period or the second notice effect. In the case where execution is possible so as to overlap with at least a part of the update display period, other notice effects are set at the timing of ending the first update display and starting the pseudo-continuous effect, or at the timing of ending the second update display and giving a dialogue notice. is preferably executed so as not to overlap with the timing of starting By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the other announcement performance as a suggestive performance due to execution of another notice performance in accordance with the end timing of the first update display and the second update display.

(Second Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-99548, a plurality of timer notice images (predetermined display) displayed on the display means ) can be executed in parallel with a timer notice (predetermined effect), and a cut-in notice, etc., that suggests the possibility of a big hit when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0". There was a thing which could carry out suggestive production. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, although the performance time of each timer notice (numerical value displayed in the timer notice image) is different, when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0", the suggestive effect is performed. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve interest without unexpectedness. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can enhance the unexpectedness and improve the interest,
The game machine of means 1 of the second invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) to update and display a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)). Effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled,
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (for example, a first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (for example, a second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display can be displayed,
As the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display (for example, "15:00") is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display. a second update display that performs an update display for decreasing the numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed as the second predetermined display so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps. and (see FIG. 8-20 (D)),
When the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 finishes the second update display at timing Ta3 , at a timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first timer image Z11 is displayed in an enlarged manner and the effect image Z15 is displayed around it, all the decoration pattern display areas 5L, After the decorative patterns 5C and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is restarted at timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has passed from timing Ta4. The part where the pseudo-continuous effect is started (see Figures 8-24 and 8-25),
When the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 in the second update display, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the second timer image Z12 to "1:00", the second update display is stopped, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and the effect image Z16 is displayed around it, and then the dialogue notice is started. 8-24, see Figure 8-25)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the numerical value when the suggestive effect is executed differs between the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, the degree of unexpectedness increases, and thus the interest is improved.
Specifically, in the first update display, when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes a numerical value indicating 0 (eg, “0:00”), the suggestive effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) is started. On the other hand, in the second update display, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 reaches a specific numerical value different from 0 (eg, "1:00"), a suggestive effect (eg, advance notice of dialogue) is started. In other words, the first update display and the second update display differ in the numerical value indicating the timing at which the suggestive effect is started. It becomes possible to

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effect executing means can display a numerical value smaller than the numerical value of the first predetermined display as the numerical value of the second predetermined display at a higher rate than a numerical value larger than the numerical value of the first predetermined display (for example, In the timer advance notice, "15:00" is displayed in the first timer image Z11, whereas in patterns TY-2, TY-3, and TY-5, "10:00" is displayed in the second timer image Z12. Part (see Fig. 8-21(A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period until the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value is shortened, so the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effects, a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 However, when the variable display result is a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (twice) and the dialogue notice patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when it is lost),
The rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed is higher when the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 than when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0. (For example, when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 is a numerical value indicating “0” (“1:00”), the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 does not become a specific numerical value, and only the first timer image Z11 is a numerical value indicating “0” (“0:00”), the part where the execution of the dialogue announcement of patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability is decided at a higher rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect in a manner in which the second update display ends before the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , the part that can execute the timer notice based on the pattern TY-2 that terminates the second update display when the numerical value is "5:00")
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the predetermined effect.
More specifically, since there is a pattern in which the second update display ends before the second predetermined display reaches a specific numerical value, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the second predetermined display reaches a specific numerical value.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The production executing means is
While the first update display is being executed as the predetermined effect, it is possible to display the second predetermined display and start the second update display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first update After the display is started, the portion where the second update display is started at the timing T1 before the timing T3 at which the first update display ends (see FIG. 8-20(D)),
When the first update display is being executed and before the second predetermined display is displayed, the second predetermined display is displayed to provide a special effect suggesting that the second update display is started. (For example, after the effect control CPU 120 starts the first update display, the second timer image Z12 is displayed and the second update display is performed before the timing Ta2 at which the second timer image Z12 is displayed. A part where a special effect is performed to suggest that the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the second update display.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect executing means can execute an interlocking effect interlocked with the update display of the second predetermined display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the decrease in the numerical value by the first update display. A part that outputs sounds such as "5...4..." and flashes the game effect lamp 9)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of updating display of numerical values.

(Third Invention)
Moreover, the present embodiment includes a third invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-99548, a plurality of timer notice images (predetermined display) displayed on the display means ) can be executed in parallel with a timer notice (predetermined effect), and a cut-in notice, etc., that suggests the possibility of a big hit when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0". There was a thing which could carry out suggestive production. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, although the performance time of each timer notice (numerical value displayed in the timer notice image) is different, when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0", the suggestive effect is performed. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve interest without unexpectedness. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can enhance the unexpectedness and improve the interest,
The game machine of means 1 of the third invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) for updating and displaying a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)), and the predetermined display becomes a specific mode (for example, when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes "0:00" or when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes "1:00") Effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state. prepared,
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (for example, a first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (for example, a second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display can be displayed,
As the predetermined effects, the first predetermined display is updated and displayed (for example, an updated display that decreases the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11), and the second predetermined display is updated and displayed (for example, The second update display for decreasing the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12) can be executed so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps (Fig. 8-20 (D) reference),
It is possible to change the speed of updating display in the first update display and the speed of updating display in the second update display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 to , a portion where the numerical value displayed on the first timer image Z11 is updated and displayed at a second speed faster than the first speed for updating, etc. (See FIG. 8-20(C))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the speed of update display differs between the first update display and the second update display, the unexpectedness is increased, and the interest is improved.
Specifically, since the speed of updating display differs between the first update display and the second update display, the relationship between the two numerical values changes as the time of the timer notice elapses. becomes difficult to predict, so the degree of surprise increases.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effect execution means is capable of performing the second update display at a speed faster than the first update display so that the second predetermined display becomes a specific mode before the first predetermined display ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 updates and displays the numerical value displayed on the second timer image Z12 at a second speed faster than the first speed for updating the numerical value displayed on the first timer image Z11. 20(C) reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period until the second predetermined display becomes the specific mode is shortened, so the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The production executing means is
A first pattern in which the first predetermined display is in a specific mode before the second predetermined display, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined display is in a specific mode before the first predetermined display. The predetermined effect can be executed based on one of a plurality of patterns (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 to the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12). A first pattern (for example, the pattern in FIG. 8-26(D)) that becomes a specific numerical value before and the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is higher than the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11. A second pattern (see FIG. 8-26 (A)) that becomes a specific numerical value before, and a portion that can execute a timer notice based on any one of a plurality of types of patterns),
As the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a variable display result When you hit a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (2 times) and the pattern of dialogue announcement patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when you lose),
The rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed is higher when the predetermined effect is executed based on the second pattern than when the predetermined effect is executed based on the first pattern (for example, As for the ratio of executing the advance notice based on the patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability, the timer advance notice is executed based on the first pattern when the timer advance notice is executed based on the second pattern. It may be higher than the time.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the predetermined effect is performed based on the second pattern.

(Fourth Invention)
Further, the present embodiment includes a fourth invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-99548, a plurality of timer notice images (predetermined display) displayed on the display means ) can be executed in parallel with a timer notice (predetermined effect), and a cut-in notice, etc., that suggests the possibility of a big hit when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0". There was a thing which could carry out suggestive production. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, although the performance time of each timer notice (numerical value displayed in the timer notice image) is different, when the numerical value of each timer notice image becomes "0", the suggestive effect is performed. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve interest without unexpectedness. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can enhance the unexpectedness and improve the interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) for updating and displaying a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)), and the predetermined display becomes a specific mode (for example, when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 becomes "0:00" or when the numerical value of the second timer image Z12 becomes "1:00") Effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state. prepared,
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (for example, a first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (for example, a second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display can be displayed,
As the predetermined effect, a first update display for performing update display of the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display (for example, an update display for decreasing the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11), and a display as the second predetermined display. A second update display that performs update display of the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 (for example, an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12) can be executed so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps. (See FIG. 8-20 (D)),
In the first predetermined display, a numerical value larger than the second predetermined display is displayed,
In the first update display, the update display may be performed faster than the second update display, and the first predetermined display may be set to the specific mode before the second predetermined display is set to the specific mode. possible (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a numerical value (eg, “20:00”) larger than the numerical value (eg, “10:00”) displayed in the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 is displayed, and the first update display is started at a first speed faster than the second speed of the second update display and then finished before the second update display.Modification 3 of FIG. , see modification 4 in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first update display and the second update display differ in numerical value and update display speed, which increases the degree of unexpectedness and enhances interest.
Specifically, in the first update display, by updating and displaying a numerical value larger than the numerical value updated in the second update display at a faster speed than in the second update display, and ending earlier, the timer can be displayed as the timer notice elapses. As a result, the relationship between the two numerical values changes, which makes it difficult to predict the start timing of each suggestive effect, increasing the degree of surprise, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The production executing means is
A first pattern in which the first predetermined display is in a specific mode before the second predetermined display, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined display is in a specific mode before the first predetermined display. The predetermined effect can be executed based on one of a plurality of patterns (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11 to the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12). A first pattern (for example, the pattern in FIG. 8-26(D)) that becomes a specific numerical value before and the numerical value displayed in the second timer image Z12 is higher than the numerical value displayed in the first timer image Z11. A second pattern (see FIG. 8-26 (A)) that becomes a specific numerical value before, and a portion that can execute a timer notice based on any one of a plurality of types of patterns),
As the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a variable display result When you hit a big hit, the part that determines the pseudo-continuous effect (2 times) and the pattern of dialogue announcement patterns SY-3 and SY-4 at a higher rate than when you lose),
The rate at which the second suggestive effect is executed is higher when the predetermined effect is executed based on the second pattern than when the predetermined effect is executed based on the first pattern (for example, As for the ratio of executing the advance notice based on the patterns SY-3 and SY-4 with high reliability, the timer advance notice is executed based on the first pattern when the timer advance notice is executed based on the second pattern. It may be higher than the time.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the predetermined effect is performed based on the second pattern.

(description of variations and applications)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be established, high probability game state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a jackpot game state, high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), special reach state (for example , super reach, etc.), including a state where the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on a big hit variation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the update display of the predetermined display, a mode in which the time (numerical value) displayed on the timer such as the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 is applied is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and numerical values to be updated and displayed may be arbitrary numerical values indicating time, period, probability, level, ratio, distance, dimension, amount, order, etc. Applicable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which "0:00" indicating time is applied as a numerical value indicating "0", but the present invention is not limited to this, and indicates "0". The numerical value may include, for example, a decimal number greater than or equal to "0" and less than "1," a decimal number greater than "-1" and less than "0."

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a specific numerical value different from "0", a numerical value of "1" larger than "0" was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the specific numerical value may be a numerical value greater than "1" (such as "2" or "3") or a numerical value less than "0" (such as "-1"). It can be an integer.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the dialogue announcement (suggestive effect) is executed when the number displayed in the second update display (second countdown) becomes "1" was exemplified, but the present invention is similar to this. However, in the second update display, a suggestion effect is executed when "GO!" is displayed after "1" is displayed, such as "... 3, 2, 1, GO!" You may make it In other words, the suggestion effect may be executed not only when "1", which is a specific numerical value different from "0", is displayed, but also when a predetermined time has passed since "1" was displayed. In this case, when a predetermined period of time elapses after "1" is displayed, a specific display such as the characters "GO!" or an image of an explosion of something may be performed. Therefore, although the display is not updated to "0" in appearance, the start timing of the suggestive effect may be the same as or before or after the timing of the update display to "0".

In the above-described embodiment, the numerical value is displayed within the frame of the timer image, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to simply display numerical values in a predetermined display area instead of displaying them in the display area. Further, the predetermined display is not limited to that displayed on the image display device 5, and may be displayed on, for example, a 7-segment display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect for updating and displaying a predetermined display, a mode is exemplified in which a timer notice capable of updating display of time is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time It is also possible to apply a countdown notice or the like that counts so that the numerical value other than the number decreases.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an update display of the predetermined display, an example is given in which an update display that decreases the numerical value (time) displayed in the predetermined display (timer image) is applied, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be an updated display that increments the displayed numerical value instead of the displayed value. In this case, for example, the numerical value indicating the level, probability, etc. is increased to a predetermined specified value (for example, 100) and updated and displayed, or the numerical value indicating the degree of expectation is increased step by step and updated and displayed. A step-up notice or the like can be applied as a predetermined effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an update display of the predetermined display, an example is given in which the numerical value (time) displayed in the predetermined display (timer image) is updated and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the updated display of the numerical value, for example, the display mode changes so that the decrease or increase of the numerical value can be specified, and the effect image displayed in a manner that can specify that the numerical value has become "0" is used. An update display of the predetermined display may be applied. Specifically, a level gauge (predetermined display) capable of displaying a level in stages is increased or decreased within a range from "0" to "MAX" to perform an update display.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state, a form is exemplified in which a pseudo-continuous effect, a dialogue notice, a super reach effect, a cut-in notice, etc. are applied, but the present invention is this. , and various effects other than the above (for example, prefetching suspension notice, stop symbol notice, etc.) may be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect) executed when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating "0" in the first update display, and the second predetermined display in the second update display. is a specific numerical value different from "0", but the present invention is not limited thereto. Both of the suggestive effects may be the same type of suggestive effects, and the first update display and the second update display may differ in the reliability of the big hit and the display mode.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, two predetermined displays (the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12) are executed so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps. , the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more predetermined effects may be executed. In this case, it is sufficient that at least two of the three or more predetermined effects are executed such that at least a part of each update display period overlaps.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the predetermined display, two predetermined displays (the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12) capable of displaying time (numerical value) are updated and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the types of numerical values that can be displayed may be different between the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display. Notice may apply.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first update display of the first timer image Z11 and the second update display of the second timer image Z12 have different update display speeds, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the update display speed may be the same between the first update display and the second update display. In addition, the update display speed was assumed to be constant during the update display period from the start to the end of the update display, but during the update display period, the update display speed can be changed by speeding up or slowing down. You may let

In the above-described embodiment, the timer notice types are the pattern TY-1 in which only the first timer image Z11 is displayed, and the patterns TY-2 to TY-2 in which the first timer image Z11 and the second timer image Z12 are displayed. TY-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may have a pattern in which only the second timer image Z12 is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer notice effect is executed within the execution period of one variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer notice effect It may be executed during the execution period of the variable display, or may be executed during the period in which the variable display is not executed, such as during the execution period of the big win effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which a suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit is executed by executing the timer notice effect. , it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 is set. Further, the numerical value displayed in the timer advance notice, the update display period, the update speed, and the start timing and end timing of the update display may differ according to the set values that have been set. For example, when a special numerical value (eg, 77) is displayed as the numerical value displayed in the timer notice, there is a high possibility of a big hit and a high setting (eg, a set value of 5 or 6). You may make it suggest that it is high.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the effect during variable display can be executed multiple times in one variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice and setting suggestion can be performed multiple times. It may be executable across variable displays.

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information (for example, display results (including jackpot types), random numbers for determining variation patterns, etc.) related to variable display whose execution is suspended when a starting prize is generated. , and the display result and the fluctuation pattern are prefetched and determined based on the extracted random value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as the effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 If it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that predicts the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice A reach notice or a setting suggestion may be executed as a pre-read notice for the target change over a plurality of times of variable display until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 during the variable display effect at predetermined timings. A form of executing the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the middle production determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the images will be destroyed and dropped has been exemplified, but the present invention has been described. is not limited to this, and when the player's operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 changes at a timing corresponding to the operation. You can let it run.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player in the variable display effect as described above, the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation valid period of the push button 31B is performed. An operation prompting image (for example, a character image or a button image that says “Continue hitting!”) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect.

Further, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is being operated, an effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying and dropping the paraglider) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B was not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be ended without performing reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, a player who knows the specific action can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, as an operation promoting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective period of operation of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the operation promoting effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting part built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific action or the player who has noticed the light emission can see the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state indication result, a form is exemplified in which a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the predetermined effects that result in an advantageous state suggesting result include a stop pattern notice suggesting which pattern the variable display pattern will stop at, a character notice that a character will appear, and a step in which the notice image changes step by step. Various advance notice effects can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects suggesting the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance notice, a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common effect period common to the reach notice and the setting suggestion. It does not have a period to perform) It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the advance notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion different from the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by, for example, making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by differentiating the display mode such as the emission color, brightness, contrast, etc. is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and the setting When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn on the second drawing layer which is lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn on the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer on the image display device 5 are drawn. When the first effect image is overlapped and displayed on the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance of the second effect image (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound modes such as the volume and quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. , that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of enhancing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only increasing the volume of the sound effect, but also decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM to increase the audibility. good too. It should be noted that there are cases where the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, when the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any one of the reproduction channels , for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. In addition, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (the first reproduction channel and the second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by changing the light emission mode such as the color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 between the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light-emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win notice is changed to the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the light emission mode corresponding to the reach advance notice may be made more visible than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. In addition, the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off in response to the setting suggestion.

In other words, when the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, the production result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In addition to increasing the execution ratio of the reach notice in the case, when the production result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the production mode such as the display, sound, and light of the reach notice is higher than the production mode of the setting suggestion Including priority etc. Furthermore, executing the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, sound , light, and movement of movable bodies.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion indicates which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set as the setting suggestion in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be, for example, the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (deferred).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

In the slot machine, a state that is advantageous to the player means a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the probability of winning a small combination, or a state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is announced (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), and a state in which an advantageous operation mode for the player is notified and the probability of winning a replay combination increases (for example, ART (Assist Replay Time) state).

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed in a slot machine, a special combination such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not complete and the special combination is carried over. Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols will be derived and displayed, and setting suggestions suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (variable display multiple times), or AT state It is possible to execute over a plurality of games (multiple times of variable display) from the time an ART state is won until the AT state or ART state is started.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantage set value (for example, 1 to 3) and a game rather than the disadvantage set value. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, 4 to 6) that is highly advantageous for a player, It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, timer notice) to update and display a predetermined display (for example, the first timer image Z11 (first timer) and the second timer image Z12 (second timer)). effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, dialogue notice/super reach effect, cut-in notice, etc.) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to The execution means can display, as the predetermined display, a first predetermined display (eg, first timer image Z11) and a second predetermined display (eg, second timer image Z12) different from the first predetermined display. , as the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value (for example, "15:00") displayed as the first predetermined display; and a numerical value that is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display. A second update display is performed so that at least a part of each update display period overlaps with a second update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value (e.g., "10:00") displayed as the second predetermined display. It is possible (see FIG. 8-20 (D)), and the suggestive effect can be executed when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 However, after the second update display ends at timing Ta3, at timing Ta4 when the numerical value of the first timer image Z11 is changed to "0:00", the first timer image Z11 is enlarged and displayed, and an effect is displayed around it. After the image Z15 is displayed and the decorative patterns in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed, at a timing Ta5 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta4, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. The part where the variable display of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is resumed to start the pseudo continuous effect (see FIGS. 8-24 and 8-25), and the second predetermined display is 0 in the second update display. The suggestive effect can be executed when a different specific value is reached (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the second timer image Z12 to “1:00” at timing Ta3, the second update A part where the display is stopped, the second timer image Z12 is enlarged and the effect image Z16 is displayed around it, and then the dialogue announcement is started. 8-24 and 8-25), as the numerical value of the second predetermined display, the numerical value smaller than the numerical value of the first predetermined display, at a higher rate than the numerical value larger than the numerical value of the first predetermined display It can be displayed (for example, patterns TY-1 to TY-5 of the timer notice display "15:00" in the first timer image Z11, whereas patterns TY-2, TY-3, and TY-5 display "15:00" A portion that displays "10:00" in the second timer image Z12 (see FIG. 8-21(A)), and a determination means (for example, the CPU 103 shown in FIG. 5) capable of determining control to the advantageous state Part for executing special symbol normal processing), and based on the determination result of the determination means, an advantageous suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state, a specific effect (for example, pattern CI -3 cut-in effect) that can be executed in a mode including and not including (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. and a portion for executing a variable display effect process shown), wherein the advantageous suggestive effect execution means is set to the disadvantage setting value, and is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state. 9-21(B), the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, the part where the cut-in effect cannot be executed in pattern CI-3),
When the advantageous set value is set and the determination means has not decided to control the advantageous state, the advantageous suggestive effect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 9-21 (C) to FIG. 9-21 (E), if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is out , a portion where the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-3), and when the advantageous suggestive effect is executed, it is informed that the advantageous state will be controlled after it is once suggested that the control will not be effected to the advantageous state. (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 9-6), and when the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the specified The ratio of execution of the advantageous suggesting effect in the aspect including the effect is lower than the ratio of execution of the advantageous suggesting effect in the aspect not including the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 9-21 (A) to 9- As shown in 21(E), when the variable display is performed with the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot that executes the resurrection performance, the variable display is performed with the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not perform the resurrection performance. A part) game machine in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case.

According to such a configuration, since the numerical value when the suggestive effect is executed differs between the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, the degree of unexpectedness increases, and thus the interest is improved. Moreover, since the period until the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value is shortened, interest is improved. In addition, when it is suggested that an advantageous suggestive effect including a specific effect is executed and control is not performed to an advantageous state, the advantageous state is established by the special pattern even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. By notifying that the control is to be performed, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to the recognition being erroneous.

Incidentally, in addition to the advantageous suggesting effect including the specific effect, the setting suggesting effect may be performed when the predetermined display is displayed. For example, when selecting from a plurality of types of numerical values to be displayed as the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, by selecting by lottery or the like using a selection table in which the selection ratio of each numerical value differs according to the set value , the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the more likely it is that a specific type of numerical value will be selected. Alternatively, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the more the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 before the first predetermined display becomes 0, and the suggestive effect is executed. You can make it higher. Alternatively, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the smaller the value of the second predetermined display than the first predetermined display. By doing so, since the numerical value at which the suggestive effect is executed differs between the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display, the degree of surprise increases, thereby improving interest, and at the same time, the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display. Since it is possible to guess whether or not the set value is advantageous for the player from the displayed numerical value or the like, the amusement of the game can be improved.
Also, if the setting value is suggested by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements such as an advantageous suggestive effect including a specific effect and numerical values displayed as the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display). When setting values that are advantageous to the player are suggested for a plurality of factors, the player can be more confident that the setting values are advantageous to the player. Even when no set value is suggested, if an advantageous set value is suggested by another element, the player can maintain the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player, thereby improving the interest in the game. can be made

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve interest and reduce the decline in interest in the game due to recognition errors, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. , disadvantageous set values (eg 1 to 3) and advantageous set values (eg 4 to 6) that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. A game machine that can set a value (for example, pachinko game machine 1), and a determination means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where CPU 103 executes special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 5) and, based on the determination result of the determining means, including an advantage suggesting effect (eg, ready-to-win effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state, and a specific effect (eg, cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). Advantageous suggestion effect execution means that can be executed in a mode and a mode not including (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18, and then executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part), wherein the advantageous suggesting effect executing means includes the specific effect when the disadvantageous set value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state. The advantage suggesting effect of the mode cannot be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 If the result is a failure, the portion where the cut-in effect cannot be executed in pattern CI-3) is set to the advantageous setting value, and it is determined by the determining means that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state. When there is not, it is possible to execute the advantageous suggesting effect in a mode including the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. If the current set value is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is a failure, the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-3), when the advantageous suggestive effect is executed, A special pattern (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes a resurrection effect shown in FIG. )), and when the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the advantageous suggesting effect in the mode including the specific effect is executed is the same as the advantageous suggesting effect in the mode not including the specific effect. A variable display is executed with a super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes a resurrection effect, which is lower than the rate at which the effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. In the case of doing so, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing the variable display in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern in which the revival effect is not executed. be done. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

Characteristic portions of other embodiments will be described below.
(Description of Characteristic Portion 208SG)

Next, the game machine in the characteristic part 208SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-39.

First, FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 208SG003, a glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is a left game area 208SG002L by operating the ball operating handle 30. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 208SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 208SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 9-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the main board 11 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 208SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 208SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 are provided. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting switching switch 208SG052 is accommodated in the substrate case 208SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting switching switch 208SG052 are housed in the substrate case 208SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 208SG201.

Since the substrate case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 208SG003 is closed. The operation is enabled by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. The lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, using a setting key. In the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 208SG201. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 208SG201. In other words, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 208SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the open sensor 208SG09 are ON when the power is turned on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 as a set value change state. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

By turning OFF the lock switch 208SG051 while any number from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the number displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. be. When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 sends a set value designation command to the effect control board 12, regardless of whether a new set value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from the setting value specifying command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 208SG025A, second reservation display 208SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 208SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, A round display 208SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state in which game balls are launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 208SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 208SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results can be derived and displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 208SG025A and the second suspension display 208SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 208SG025A and second pending display 208SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second LED from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 208SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 208SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 208SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 208SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321, and the second movable body 208SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. An origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 9-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 208SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probable variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the characteristic portion 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 9-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach is executed, and the super reach in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a variation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, five or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β , super reach γ, and super reach δ. In addition, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment Super reach variation pattern special figure fluctuation time in which super reach effect such as super reach is executed Super reach δ, super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α in order of special figure fluctuation pattern is set long.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as the variation pattern of the super reach γ, after once notifying that the variable display result is a win as the reach performance of the super reach γ, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. There is provided a variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 9-6) for executing a resurrection effect. For this reason, the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect is set to have a special figure variation time longer than the variation pattern of normal super reach γ and a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern of super reach δ. However, it is exceptionally the highest (100%) variation pattern for the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. Table, jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), jackpot variation pattern determination A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a losing variation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

9-7 to 9-10 are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

Figure 9-7 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 9-7 (E) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 9-8 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 4 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 6, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 9-9 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-9 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or short time state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 9-9 (E) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-9 (F) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-10 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-10 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state, "big hit" special figure assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big hit" when the normal state or the time saving state is controlled to the big hit game state (this embodiment is 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, 1/240 when the setting value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6). In the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/160, and when the setting value is 4, it is 1 /140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state according to each setting value respectively Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the set value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

9-11 (A) and 9-11 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 9-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 9-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability high base state, and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature part 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the resurrection effect are executed. No super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), super reach γ jackpot variation pattern with resurrection effect executed (PB1-5), super reach δ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 51 to 200 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). 401 to 650 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) in which no resurrection effect is performed, and 651 to 700 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns in which resurrection effect is performed. (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation pattern for the big hit is determined using one variation pattern determination table, that is, the pachinko Although a form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the setting value set in the game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , the determination ratio of each variation pattern may be made different for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β deviation (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5). A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach δ deviation variation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is super reach α. is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation ( PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Variation pattern of loss of reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of loss of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of loss of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of loss of super reach δ (PS2-5) , a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of deviation of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of deviation of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ (PA2-5) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for is possible is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2) , 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). , and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 850 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 851 to 930 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Variation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to super reach γ deviation variation patterns, and 971 to 997 are assigned to super reach δ deviation variation patterns, that is, if the variable display result is deviation, super reach Since the variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern for loss is a variation pattern for loss of super reach α, a variation pattern for loss of super reach β, a variation pattern for loss of super reach γ, and a variation pattern for loss of super reach δ. Although each determination ratio exemplifies a form that is completely the same between each set value, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination rate of the pattern, the variation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ, and the variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ may be different for each set value.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is out of range, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 9-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the form of determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect is to be executed are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The general pattern holding storage unit stores the holding information of the general pattern game which has not yet been started by the normal pattern display device 208SG020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Also, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting portion, data constituting a reception command buffer at the time of start winning is stored. In the start winning command buffer, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4" area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed. In addition, in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4" area corresponding to) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, a start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), or a pending memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer correspond to these commands, and the first special figure reservation storage and the second special A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the data separately from the drawing reserved storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted upward one by one as shown in FIG.

Effect control CPU120, at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening, stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, commands are stored from the top (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage. I will go.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 103 in the characterizing portion 208SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-15 is a flow chart showing the starting winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 9-15, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (208SGS502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should be possible to specify the number of the first special figure reservation memory. When the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (208SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (208SGS505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 208SGS505, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (208SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (208SGS506).

In addition, when the second start opening switch is not ON (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reservation memory number is the upper limit (208SGS505; Y), the start prize determination process is terminated.

After executing either of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start buffer value is "2", the first Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (208SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (208SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (208SGS516), the start prize determination process is performed. exit. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 9-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 208SGS 512 of FIG. 9-15 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 208SG, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in the special symbol normal process (step S22 in FIG. 5), the display corresponding to the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the set value Result determination table (see FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10) is selected, and the selected display result determination table is used to set the special figure display result (variable display result of special symbols) as "jackpot" and the jackpot game state It is determined whether or not to control to a small hit game state as a determination of whether to control to a special figure display result as a "small hit".

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning of 208SGS512. By determining whether or not it is determined to stop displaying the big hit pattern or the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. conduct. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 208SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state at machine 1 (208SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a probability variable state (high probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is on, and is in a short time state (low probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is off and the time saving flag is on. , and specify that it is in a normal state (low probability low base state) when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 208SGS521, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, a display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 1 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 9-7 (A) Set the display result determination table, set the setting value is 1 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), and the setting value is 2 And if the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (C) is set, and the set value is 2 and the game state is a variable probability If there is, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. ) to set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. to set.

Also, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 4 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 4 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), the setting value is 5 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), the set value is 6 and the game state is normal state or time saving state shown in FIG. 9-8 (E) Set the first special figure display result determination table, and set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-8 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 9-9 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 1 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), the setting value is 2 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), and if the setting value is 3 and the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 9-9 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-9 (F) when the set value is 3 and the game state is a variable probability state .

Also, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 4 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 9-10 (A) Set the table, if the set value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), set the set value is 5 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-10 (D) is set, and if the set value is 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 9-10 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-10 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs processing to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In addition, in the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table are compared with the value of the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a big hit, and if the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a small hit. However, if the value of the random number MR1 is out of the numerical range of the big hit determination value and out of the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined as lost.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined at 208SGS525 that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined not to be a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, when it is determined that it will be lost in the variable display (208SGS527;N), the first symbol designation, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), select and set the deviation pattern determination table A for deviation shown in FIG. (208SGS528; Y), selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 9-14(D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined at 208SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command (208SGS534), then select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), go to 208SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined at 208SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (208SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming "small hit". Execute (208SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-13 (B) (208SGS532), and proceed to 208SGS536.

In addition, in this feature part 208SG, in these variation pattern determination table A to variation pattern determination table D for loss, a determination value of 1 to 700 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern in common. 701 to 997 are assigned super reach fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss. Even if the number of pending memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss is used. is determined.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532, and 208SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (208SGS536). In this characteristic part 208SG, as shown in FIG. 9-16(B), at least when the variable display result is "loss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the "non-reach" variable display mode is common. A variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" variation category, and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

Incidentally, the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. 9-17 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer at the time of start winning, for one buffer number (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, for example, a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered as the stop pattern is displayed. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, if the received display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, for example, a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are arranged in an odd number other than "7" or "3" as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Then, if the received display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are "7" or "3" as a stop pattern (jackpot design). Also, if the received display result designation command is the result designation command of the fifth variable table that indicates a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" or "246", or three consecutive even numbers (or (odd numbers) and other decorative patterns (small winning patterns) are determined. When the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating a loss, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (lost pattern) different from the above-described big win patterns and small win patterns is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop pattern of the decoration pattern may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After executing 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of Super Reach can be specified from the variation pattern designation command read in 208SG275. If the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; Y), cut for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in effect to be described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. In effect determination processing (208SGS278) is executed and the process proceeds to 208SGS279. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, at 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the notice effect (208SGS279). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-29, the notice effect is a effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns. It is an effect that can be executed in the period from the time to the timing of reach.

After executing 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (208SGS282). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, a variable time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time (variable display time) specified by the variable pattern designation command (208SGS283). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208SGS285).

9-18 to 9-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). If the variation pattern is a super reach α or super reach β variation pattern (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern is a super reach γ or super reach δ variation pattern (208SGS301; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (208SGS302).

When the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether the variation pattern is PB1-5, that is, whether it is the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect (208SGS303). . When the variation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the jackpot type (208SGS304), and determines whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). .

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. proceed to In addition, in 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Note that the cut-in effect in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 and 9-31, displays the image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of super reach γ. and prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to patterns.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-31, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w with a blue effect, and the effect pattern is If it is pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005x with a red effect. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005z with a rainbow effect.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS307), Go to 208SGS308. In addition, in 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10%. determined by the ratio of In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 1%.

After executing 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), and terminates the cut-in effect determination process.

Also, in 208SGS303, if the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the pachinko game machine 1. (208SGS311), and determines whether or not the specified setting value is one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified based on the setting value designation command received from the CPU 103 .

In addition, when execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the cut-in effect start waiting timer times out, a cut-in effect process table corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table each time the variable display effect process is executed. 9, etc.) to execute the cut-in effect.

If the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), a cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. 208SGS3316 determines the presence/absence of and effect pattern (208SGS3316), and executes the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In the 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 9-21(B), the cut-in Non-execution of production is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C. The presence or absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in the 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is the jackpot C. Runs are determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is wrong in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is wrong. The presence or absence of performance execution and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-21(B), in 208SGS318, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is reduced to 55% based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result being a failure. Decide on a percentage. Also, as a cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS312 is any one of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4. (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big win type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether the big win type is a big win A or a big win B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS325), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in the 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 9-21(C), the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS324; N), based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. As shown in FIG. 9-21(C), the 208SGS326 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high probability high base state (208SGS327). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS327; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4 and the variable display result is off and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS329), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (C), the setting value is 4, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5. (208SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS334), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in the 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 9-21(D), based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS333; N), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 9-21(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a loss in 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is a high probability high base state (208SGS336). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS336; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (D), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 35%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5 and the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS338), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (D), the setting value is 5, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the variable It is determined whether or not the displayed result is a big hit (208SGS339). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS342), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in the 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 9-21(E), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS341; N), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 9-21(E), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a loss in 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is a high probability high base state (208SGS344). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS344; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is lost, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6 and the variable display result is off and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS346), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (E), the setting value is 6, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variation pattern of super reach δ is (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). . Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. 208SGS310 is executed. 9-22, the 208SGS354 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. FIG. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS353; N), based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS355), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is performed. to run. Incidentally, in 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 9-22, based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is a failure (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. process. Incidentally, in 208SGS356, as shown in FIG. 9-22, based on the result of the variable display being a failure, it is decided at a rate of 35% not to execute the cut-in effect. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the performance is not executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, it is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Big hit expectation in cut-in effect: non-execution<pattern CI-1<pattern CI-2<pattern CI-3<pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-4, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined that the variable display result is the big win and the big win type is the big win C.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-21, 9-22, and 9-24, when performing variable display with the variation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ, the cut-in effect is set to pattern CI-3. The execution ratio is set to be the lowest (0%) when the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern is super reach γ deviation/super reach δ deviation. Then, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ jackpot for executing the resurrection performance, the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern does not execute the resurrection performance - the super reach γ jackpot/super reach δ jackpot, the set value. is 4 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 5 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 6 and the variation pattern. is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to increase.

Also, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3, When the cut-in performance is executed in pattern CI-3, while it is determined that the variable display result will be a big win (any of the big wins A to C), the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. is 4 to 6, even if the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result may be wrong. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3. The expectation of a big hit is set low when the effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the ready-to-win effect of super reach γ is executed, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost, the pachinko game machine 1 is determined to be any one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, if we focus on the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the resurrection effect, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 more than the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4) that executes the resurrection effect. and pattern CI-4 are set low. Therefore, in the case where the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the cut-in effect is executed in CI-3 and the failure is notified, so that the pachinko game machine In spite of the player recognizing that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the resurrection performance is executed later and the big win is notified, thereby pachinko. This prevents the player from being discouraged when the set value set in the gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, which becomes indefinite.

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. If you pay attention to it, when the variable display result is a big hit, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 is set to be the same for all set values, but when the variable display result is a loss. , the higher the setting value, the higher the ratio of execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 (the ratio of execution of pattern CI-3 at the time of failure when setting values are 4 to 6: setting value 4 < setting value 5<setting value 6).

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is different. Since the frequency becomes higher, the player can expect that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. there is

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. , if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display results are different, if the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the game state is the low-probability-high-base state or the low-probability The pattern CI-3 is set to perform the cut-in effect at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the high-probability-high base state, and the variable display result is lost, so that the game state is low-probability. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to one of the set values 4 to 6, so that the player can be urged to continue the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. ing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-21(B) to 9-21(E), focusing on the case where the variable display result is lost, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the cut-in. The performance execution ratio is set high. In other words, in the present characteristic portion 208SG, it is suggested that any of the set values 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko game machine 1 for the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is lost. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed in a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed. It is possible to improve a game interest.

9-21 and 9-22 are merely an example, and the determination ratio of the cut-in effect pattern is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. You may make it differ from the characteristic part 208SG suitably. However, if the determination ratio of the effect pattern of these cut-in effects is appropriately changed, the tendency of the degree of expectation of the jackpot of each effect pattern (the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the cut-in effect: non-execution < pattern CI-1 < pattern CI-2 <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself is maintained so that a player does not misunderstand the degree of expectation for a big win according to the production pattern of the cut-in production when the cut-in production is executed. is desirable.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In this example, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the setting value set in the variable display and the variable display result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super In the case of performing variable display with the variation pattern of reach γ or super reach δ, cut-in effect may be performed without fail during the variable display. In this way, when the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, The percentage assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect when the variable display result is a loss (see FIGS. 9-21 (C) to 9-21 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to differ from the characteristic portion 208SG. By doing so, it is possible to improve interest by executing cut-in effects during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, while preventing excessive cut-in effects from being executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6.

FIG. 9-25 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 9-17. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big win or a loss (208SGS362; N), execution of cut-in effect is further determined. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not any cut-in effect pattern is stored (208SGS363).

When execution of cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored effect pattern of cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364 ). If the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. Then, based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, whether or not to execute the announcement effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big win (208SGS366; Y), the big win type is specified (208SGS367), and the presence or absence of execution of the notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big win type (208SGS368).

Also, if the variable display result is a failure (208SGS366; N), the presence or absence of execution of the announcement effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the process of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 9-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 15%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Incidentally, as described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost is set to the pachinko game machine 1. This is the case where the set value is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4).

As shown in FIGS. 9-26(C) and 9-30, pattern YE-1 is a production pattern for displaying an image 208SG005s of character A on the image display device 5 with a blue effect. , and pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern in which the image 208SG005t of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 with a red effect, and pattern YE-3 is a effect pattern in which the image 208SG005u of character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying a collective image 208SG005v of characters A to C on the image display device 5 with a rainbow color effect.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 9-26(B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 45%, and the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, and the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 9-26(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), the non-execution of the notice effect is reduced by 50%. Decide on a percentage. In addition, as execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. again,
Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach loss), non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is patterned. When executed in YE-1, when the notice effect is executed in pattern YE-2, when the notice effect is executed in YE-3, when the notice effect is executed in YE-4. It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit is high (Expectation of the big hit of the advance notice effect: non-execution of notice effect <execution in pattern YE-1<execution in pattern YE-2<execution in pattern YE-3<pattern YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B), when it is determined that the cut-in effect is not to be executed, or the cut-in effect is a pattern CI- in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of the pattern CI-3 and the pattern CI-4. 1 or pattern CI-2 is determined, there is provided a case where the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is jackpot C. For this reason, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, it is also determined whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to attract people's attention.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-26(A), pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, or a variable display result is a big hit as an effect pattern of cut-in effect. In the case where the pattern CI-4 that determines that the jackpot type is the jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 will be used as the effect pattern of the notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the variation pattern. It is set to never run. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only with pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2, so that the cut-in effect is started when the variable display result is a big hit. This prevents the player from recognizing it at a timing (starting timing of the advance notice effect) before the timing. Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss, both the advance notice effect and the cut-in effect are not executed in the effect pattern with a high expectation of the big win, so the player is excessively concerned about the variable display result becoming a big win. It is prevented to expect

After executing any of the processes 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern decided by one of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to give the notice. The effect determination process is ended (208SGS372). When it is decided not to execute the notice effect (208SGS370; N), the notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

It should be noted that, when the execution of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for advance notice performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9) in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the process table for notice effect each time the effect process during variable display is executed. etc.) can be used to execute the forewarning effect.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. In the fluctuation pattern of loss, the notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 during variable display, and in the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display. 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display from pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. 3 is executable. It should be noted that, in the fluctuation pattern of the loss of the normal reach, the loss of the super reach α, and the loss of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-28, in the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ, it is possible to execute the notice effects in patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. , cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-3 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-29(A) and 9-29(B), in the variation patterns of the super reach γ jackpot in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the notice effect is performed in patterns YE-1 to YE-1 in the period before the reach. Pattern YE-4 can be executed, and cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-4 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when executing the variable display in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-30 to 9-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-30(A) to 9-30(E), when execution of the announcement effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the image display device 5 performs the announcement effect in the pattern YE-. 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 with a blue effect, and when the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2 , the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and when the announcement effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the group image 208SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a rainbow color effect.

At this time, the player expects a big hit according to which of the character images 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, and 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is and the color of the effect displayed together with the character image. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the notice effect is executed only in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It is possible.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach γ, as shown in FIGS. A ready-to-reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a friend character and an enemy character fight in this characteristic portion 208SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31(D), when it comes time to start executing the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player , prompting to operate the push button 31B is performed. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. When the acceptance period has passed, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 along with a cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-1,
When the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5 and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and a cut-in effect is performed. When the in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed with a golden effect on the image display device 5, and when the preview effect is executed in pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 A cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player can determine which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z the cut-in images displayed on the image display device 5 are, and the colors of the effects displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 (A) and 9-32 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern), super reach γ As a result of the ready-to-win effect (battle effect), the ally character loses to the enemy character, and it is notified that the result of the variable display is lost, and the variable display ends. Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 (A) and 9-32 (C), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect) , as a result of ready-to-reach effect (battle effect result) of super reach-gamma, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character wins over the enemy character, and the variable display ends.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-32(A), 9-32(D) to 9-32(F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot for executing resurrection effect variation pattern), it is once notified that the variable display result is lost when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of super reach γ. Then, by executing the resurrection effect, it is once again reported that the variable display result is a big hit by the ally character winning against the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, Variable display ends.

Although not shown in the figure, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach δ, after the decoration pattern is displayed in combination with the reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same way as the reach performance of super reach γ. battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. It should be noted that the battle production as the ready-to-reach production of super reach δ may be produced in the same manner as the battle production as the ready-to-reach production of super reach γ. may

As described above, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-21, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI While it is determined that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing at -3, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a cut-in effect is performed. There is a case where the variable display result is out of line when the pattern CI-3 is executed. In other words, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is lost, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. , when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not, and the amusement of the game can be improved. there is

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-21, as a variation pattern capable of executing a cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect, once it is notified that the variable display result is lost, Super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern (super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern to execute revival presentation, PB1-5) and super ready-to-win not to perform revival presentation to inform that the variable display result is a big win by executing revival presentation γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) are provided, and when variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the revival performance, the super reach γ jackpot variation that does not execute the revival performance. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. For this reason, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is not displayed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by the player. is any one of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to 4 to 6 by executing the resurrection performance and announcing that the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest in the game due to an error in recognizing that it is either of the above.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, disadvantageous set values are set to 1 to 3, and advantageous set values are set to 4 to 6, which are set in the pachinko game machine 1. Depending on whether the set value is a disadvantageous set value or an advantageous set value, the decision ratio of the cut-in effect or the notice effect pattern is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the unfavorable setting value is 1 and the advantageous setting value is 6, the values may be set in any range that does not overlap each other. Specifically, only 1 to 5 disadvantageous setting values and 6 advantageous setting values may be used, or only 1 disadvantageous setting value and 2 to 6 advantageous setting values may be used.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the advantageous suggesting effect in the present invention is described as a ready-to-reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous suggesting effect in the present invention is variable. Any effect other than the ready-to-win effect may be used as long as the effect can be executed during the display, such as a pseudo-continuous effect in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed repeatedly.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 (C) to 9-21 (E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the deviation of the super reach γ When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game is performed. When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more frequently the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is wrong, and the higher the setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since the player can expect the setting, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern. shows a form in which the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, the pachinko game Regardless of the setting value set in machine 1, the rate at which the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 may be the same rate. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of super reach γ loss, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to identify a person.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and FIG. 9-13. As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big win, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using one big win variation pattern determination table regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the ratio of executing the resurrection performance during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the execution ratio of the resurrection performance during the variable display follows the set value for determining the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit, the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection performance is executed during the variable display. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute any reach effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are exemplified in a form that is previously determined in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute a resurrection effect can be changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be determined as appropriate from the display result or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-22, as the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result always becomes a big hit, so the variations of the super reach effect increase and the super Since the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win performance of the reach δ, and the variable display result can make the player pay attention to whether or not the result will be a big hit, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, an example is provided in which variation patterns (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect of super reach δ may not be provided.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win state (or until the end timing of the variable display) and a ready-to-reach state. A cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect is provided. Furthermore, the advance notice effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect patterns (pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-4) with different degrees of expectation for big hits. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-26, when the variable display result is a big win and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which are effect patterns with a high expectation of a big win. When executing the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot. By executing YE-3 or YE-4, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit by executing the notice effect pattern YE-1 or YE-2. It is possible to keep the player's attention until the end of the variable display, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

9-27 and 9-28, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, during the variable display of 1, the notice effect is set at a timing before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). When the variable display result becomes a big win, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big win from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest by preventing this.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, during the variable display of 1, the form in which the announcement effect can be executed at the timing before the cut-in effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect during the variable display executed before the variable display for executing the cut-in effect. Furthermore, the notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect, so that the variable display result is obtained during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing that is a big hit and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 and 9-22, when the variable display result is a big win, the big win type is always the big win C when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is set to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. In the case of losing, the player can be made to think that even if the player wins a big win, it might have been a big win A or B. can reduce the decrease in

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-26, one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is When there is a possibility of losing), when the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, when the advance notice performance is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Since the production pattern is determined from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, by executing the advance notice production in pattern YE-3 and YE-4 It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not result in a big hit, the pattern CI-3 and the pattern YE-3 or YE-4 are executed during the same variable display, so that the variable display result becomes a big win. It is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations of

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, one of 4 to 6 is set as the setting value for the pachinko game machine 1, and the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3, which is a effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. As a mode for restricting the execution of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 of the notice effect when the execution of is made unexecutable in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4), but the present invention is not limited to this. is set, and when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a pattern with high expectations for a big hit, the advance notice effect is performed at a rate lower than that of pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2. Pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 may be executable. In other words, "when the advantageous set value is set and it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the advantageous suggesting effect in a mode including the specific effect" is executed, the execution of the second predetermined suggestive effect is restricted." Also included is a mode in which pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 are executed at a lower rate than when pattern YE-2 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-21, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is a variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. In the case, if the set value is the same value, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state is the cut-in effect in the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state. It is set higher than the rate of execution in pattern CI-3. For this reason, when the gaming state is a high-probability-high base state, cut-in production is performed in the variable display of super reach γ out more than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state. Since the pattern CI-3 is executed more frequently, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 in the high-probability-high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state. can improve the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 because the player can easily continue the game even after the game state shifts to the low-probability-low base state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is performed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. When it is executed, if the game state is a high-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut-in at a higher rate than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state Although a form in which the effect can be executed in pattern CI-3 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , and when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. If the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-21, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variation pattern for not executing the resurrection effect is displayed. (PA2-4 and PB1-4), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 (A) to 9-33 (E) as a modification 208SG-1, when executing variable display with a variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing a resurrection effect , the cut-in effect may be disabled in pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is lost, any one of 4 to 6 is set to the pachinko game machine 1 as the set value. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement in a game due to the execution of a resurrection performance and the notification that the result of variable display is a big hit despite the player's recognition that it is set.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed with the super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the super ready-to-win γ big win variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the embodiment in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and modification 208SG-2 is shown in FIG. As shown in -34 (A) to FIG. 9-34 (D), when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival production, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival production is displayed. The ratio of performing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of performing the variable display in the variation pattern. By doing so, for example, the player puts more importance on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not than whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. In the case where it is, after the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is notified of the loss, the resurrection effect is further executed and the result of the variable display is the big hit. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is notified, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the above-described embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5 ), the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-3. As shown in 9-35 (A) to FIG. 9-35 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a super reach γ jackpot for executing a resurrection effect. When the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3 In either case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variable display result is the jackpot, and is set in the pachinko game machine 1. After it is determined that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and it is once notified that the variable display result is lost during the reach performance of super reach γ during the variable display, the resurrection performance is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be announced as a big win, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

That is, in the characteristic part 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting that is set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the variable display result is lost By confirming that the value is one of 4 to 6, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. When the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and further the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to promote the continuation of the game against.

Further, in the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-26, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is a deviation variation pattern When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be a pattern CI-1 or CI-2, which is a pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is performed. exemplifies a form in which the advance notice effect can be executed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the execution in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is determined. It is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. and when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PA2-4) in which super reach γ is lost, it is decided to execute the pattern CI-3, which is a production pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, as a cut-in production. In the case where the cut-in effect is a pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the forewarning effect is performed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 is determined to be executed. It may be executable. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 By executing the notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than , it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be wrong. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game will be a big hit, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. And when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), if the game state is the high probability high base state, the game state is low if the set value is the same Although the form in which the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than the probability low base state or the low probability high base state has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a modification As shown in FIG. 9-37 as 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is variably displayed with a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4). is executed, if the gaming state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut at a higher rate than if the game state is a high-probability-high base state The in effect may be made executable in pattern CI-3.

By doing this, if the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state, at a higher rate than when the gaming state is a high probability high base state During the reach production of super reach γ Since the cut-in effect is easily executed in the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit for a long period of time (for example, variable display of 1000 times) in the low-probability-low base state. When the willingness to continue the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. is notified to the player, the player's desire to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability-high base state can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). When the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same value, a cut-in effect will be performed at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Although the pattern CI-3 exemplifies a form that can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 208SG-6, as shown in FIG. When the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state , the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high probability high base state. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, so the high probability Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state in which the variable display result is less likely to result in a big hit than the high base state, the game interest in these low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state can be enhanced. can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of super reach γ and super reach δ was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-39 (A) and 9-39 (B) as a modification 208SG-7, during the reach production of super reach γ and super reach δ, instead of cut-in production, pachinko game A set value suggesting effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be made executable. In addition, in the case where the setting value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the period (for example, , the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the ready state), the above-mentioned notice effect can be executed, and the execution ratio of the setting value suggesting effect may differ according to the effect pattern of the notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, the set value is set at a higher rate than when the notice effect is executed in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It suffices if the suggestive effect can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which production pattern the announcement effect is executed, and when the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting value suggesting performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance, the player can be prevented from overlooking the set value suggesting performance.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect for updating and displaying a predetermined display and capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state;
The production executing means is
As the predetermined display, it is possible to display a first predetermined display and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display, which are displays suggesting the start timing of the suggestive effect, and
As the predetermined effect, a first update display that performs an update display that decreases the numerical value displayed as the first predetermined display, and a numerical value that is different from the numerical value of the first predetermined display and is displayed as the second predetermined display. A second update display that performs a decreasing update display can be performed such that at least a portion of each update display period overlaps,
the suggestive effect can be started when the first predetermined display becomes a numerical value indicating 0 in the first update display;
When the second predetermined display becomes a specific numerical value different from 0 in the second update display, the suggestive effect can be started in the display area of the second predetermined display that has reached the specific numerical value,
it is possible to initiate the second update display while executing the first update display;
At the timing when the first update display is being executed, the second update display is terminated before the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display in the second update display is decreased to reach the specific numerical value. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect in a manner,
In the second predetermined display, if the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display is decreased and the second update display ends before reaching the specific numerical value, the suggestion effect corresponding to the second update display is performed. without executing
In the second update display, the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display is decreased to become the specific numerical value, and the suggestive effect corresponding to the second update display is started. The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the numerical value displayed as the second predetermined display in the display does not decrease to the specific numerical value and the suggestive effect is not started .
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images